advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 627
2019 OWNER’S MANUAL 3 WARNING California Proposition 65 Warning Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner. Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up. California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act A Few Words About Safety The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility. As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment. To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. Software End User License Agreement Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment. Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement. You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746. Privacy Notice This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices. You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including: ● Safety Labels - on the vehicle. ● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean: 3DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions. 3WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions. 3CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions. ● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. ● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. ● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely. This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully. Contents This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold. This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model. Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features. This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada. The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. 2 Safe Driving P. 29 For Safe Driving P. 30 Seat Belts P. 35 Airbags P. 42 2 Instrument Panel P. 73 Indicators P. 74 Gauges and Multi-Information Display P. 103 2 Controls P. 109 Clock P. 110 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 111 Security System P. 133 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 136 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 161 Adjusting the Seats P. 163 Heating and Cooling System * P. 195 2 Features P. 199 Audio System P. 200 General Information on the Audio System P. 299 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * P. 349 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 352, 377 2 Driving P. 411 Before Driving P. 412 Towing a Trailer P. 420 Parking Your Vehicle P. 503 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 512 2 Maintenance P. 519 Before Performing Maintenance P. 520 Maintenance MinderTM P. 523 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 545 Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance P. 558 2 Handling the Unexpected P. 567 Tools P. 568 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 569 Overheating P. 585 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 587 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 597 2 Information P. 601 Specifications P. 602 Emissions Testing P. 607 Identification Numbers P. 604 Warranty Coverages P. 609 Contents Quick Reference Guide Child Safety P. 55 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 70 Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 128 Opening and Closing the Moonroof * P. 140 Interior Lights/Convenience Items P. 171 Audio System Basic Operation P. 207, 225 Customized Features P. 318 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 432 Refueling P. 514 Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 130 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 142 Climate Control System * P. 188 Audio Error Messages P. 295 When Driving P. 434 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 517 Maintenance Under the Hood P. 527 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 547 Cleaning P. 559 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 539 Battery P. 556 Accessories and Modifications P. 565 Engine Does Not Start P. 578 Fuses P. 591 Refueling P. 598 Jump Starting P. 581 Emergency Towing P. 596 Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 605 Authorized Manuals P. 611 Reporting Safety Defects P. 606 Customer Service Information P. 612 P. 4 Safety Labels P. 71 Safe Driving P. 29 Instrument Panel P. 73 Controls P. 109 Features P. 199 Driving P. 411 Maintenance P. 519 Handling the Unexpected P. 567 Information P. 601 Index P. 613 Braking P. 490 Remote Transmitter Care P. 557 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 584 Quick Reference Guide Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❙ ❙ ECON Button (P444) ❙ System Indicators (P74) ❙ Gauges (P103) ❙ Multi-Information Display (P104) (Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P479) ❙ Parking Sensor System Button * (P505) ❙ Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button * (P497) ❙ AC Power Outlet Button * (P185) ❙ Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button * (P454) ❙ Bed Light Button (P186) ❙ Canadian models Heated Windshield Button (P156) ❙ Audio System (P200) ❙ Navigation System * () See the Navigation System Manual ❙ Hazard Warning Button ❙ Climate Control System * (P188) ❙ Heating and Cooling System * (P195) ❙ Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button (P156) ❙ Front Seat Heater Buttons * (P181) ❙ Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation Buttons * (P182) ❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button (P142) ❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P160) 4 ❙ Audio Remote Controls (P205) ❙ Brightness Control (P157) ❙ Wipers/Washers (P154) Quick Reference Guide ❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P145, 146) ❙ Fog Lights * (P149) ❙ LaneWatchTM* (P488) ❙ CRUISE Button * (P447) ❙ MAIN Button * (P458) ❙ Interval Button * (P465) ❙ Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button * (P472) ❙ RESET Button (P104) ❙ (Information) Button (P104) ❙ Horn (Press an area around .) ❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons * () See the Navigation System Manual ❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Buttons (P352, 377) ❙ Heated Steering Wheel Button * (P180) * Not available on all models 5 Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❙ Power Window Switches (P136) ❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P123) ❙ Memory Buttons * (P159) ❙ SET Button * (P159) ❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Button (P515) ❙ Rearview Mirror (P161) ❙ Driver’s Front Airbag (P45) ❙ Shift Lever (P442) ❙ Passenger’s Front Airbag (P45) ❙ Accessory Power Socket (P177) ❙ USB Port * (P201) ❙ Glove Box (P173) ❙ Trunk Main Switch (P131) ❙ Accessory Power Socket (P177) ❙ Auxiliary Input Jack (P203) ❙ USB Port (P201) ❙ Intelligent Traction Management Button (P445) ❙ Parking Brake (P490) ❙ Interior Fuse Box (P594) ❙ Hood Release Handle (P528) ❙ Door Mirror Controls (P162) 6 ❙ USB Ports * (P201) ❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P51) ❙ Grab Handle ❙ Coat Hook (P178) ❙ Seat Belts (P38) ❙ Sun Visors ❙ Vanity Mirrors Quick Reference Guide ❙ Rear Seat (P166) ❙ Map Lights (P172) ❙ Moonroof Switch * (P140) ❙ Back Window Switch * (P138) ❙ Map Lights (P172) ❙ HomeLink® Buttons * (P349) ❙ Sunglasses Holder (P179) ❙ Front Seat (P163) ❙ Side Airbags (P49) ❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P63) ❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P63) ❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P60) * Not available on all models 7 Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P527) ❙ Windshield Wipers (P154, 545) ❙ Power Door Mirrors (P162) ❙ Side Turn Signal Lights * (P145, 542) ❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P114) ❙ Headlights (P146, 539) ❙ Front Side Marker Lights (P146, 541) ❙ Daytime Running Lights /Parking Lights * (P150, 541) ❙ Tires (P547, 569) ❙ Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights * (P145, 542) ❙ Fog Lights * (P149, 542) ❙ How to Refuel (P515) ❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P544) ❙ Bed Lights (P186) ❙ AC Power Outlet * (P184) ❙ Opening and Closing the Trunk (P130) ❙ Swing Opening the Tailgate (P129) ❙ Rear License Plate Light (P544) ❙ Drop Opening the Tailgate (P129) ❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P512) ❙ Rear License Plate Light (P544) ❙ Rear Turn Signal and Back-Up Lights (P543) ❙ Brake/Taillight and Rear Side Marker Lights (P543) 8 Eco Assist® System ● Changes color to reflect your driving style. Green: Fuel efficient driving Light green: Moderate acceleration/deceleration White: Aggressive acceleration/deceleration ● The ambient meter color changes in accordance with your brake or accelerator pedal operation. Quick Reference Guide Ambient Meter ECON Mode Indicator (P87) ECON Button (P444) Helps maximize fuel economy. Comes on when the ECON button is pressed. * Not available on all models 9 Safe Driving (P29) Quick Reference Guide Airbags (P42) ● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision. Child Safety (P55) ● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. ● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. ● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat. Exhaust Gas Hazard (P70) ● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate. Seat Belts (P35) Before Driving Checklist (P34) ● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat. ● Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly. ● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted. Fasten your lap belt as low as possible. 10 Instrument Panel (P73) System Indicators Blind spot information (BSI) Indicator * Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Intelligent Traction Management Indicator Tachometer Security System Alarm Indicator System Indicators Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator * Temperature Gauge Speedometer CRUISE MAIN Indicator * Malfunction Indicator Lamp Low Oil Pressure Indicator All-wheel drive system (AWD) Indicator * CRUISE CONTROL Indicator * Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) System Indicator Supplemental Restraint System Indicator Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators VSA® OFF Indicator Immobilizer System Indicator Smart Entry System Indicator Charging System Indicator Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator Ambient Meter Shift Lever Position Indicator ECON Mode Indicator Auto high-beam Indicator * Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator * Fuel Gauge Multi-Information Display Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator System Message Indicator Quick Reference Guide Gauges (P103)/Multi-Information Display (P104)/System Indicators (P74) U.S. Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red) Canada Lights Indicators Brake System Indicator (Amber) U.S. System Indicators Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator * Lights On Indicator High Beam Indicator Fog Light Indicator * Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator * Bed Lights On Indicator Canada Low Fuel Indicator Seat Belt Reminder Indicator * Not available on all models 11 Controls Quick Reference Guide 12 (P109) Clock (P110) Models with Display Audio Models with color audio system ENGINE START/STOP Button (P142) Press the button to change the vehicle’s power mode. a Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button for two seconds. b Select Adjust Clock, then press c Rotate d Press to switch to minute adjustment. e Rotate f Press to switch to Set. g Press to complete clock adjustment. . to adjust the hours. to adjust the minutes. a Select b Select Clock/Info, then Clock Adjustment. c Adjust the dates, hours and minutes by selecting 3 / 4 . d Select OK to set the time. , then select Settings. Turn Signals (P145) Turn Signal Control Lever Wipers and Washers (P154) Models with automatic intermittent wipers Wiper/Washer Control Lever Right MIST OFF AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically INT*2: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe Left Lights (P146) Light Control Switches Steering Wheel (P160) ● To adjust, push the adjustment lever down, adjust to the desired position, then pull up the lever back in place. Quick Reference Guide AUTO should always be turned OFF before cleaning the windshield or driving through a car wash. Pull toward you to spray washer fluid. High Beam Low Beam Flashing Adjustment Ring (- : Low Sensitivity*1 (- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2 (+ : High Sensitivity*1 (+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2 *1:Models with automatic intermittent wipers *2:Models without automatic intermittent wipers 13 Quick Reference Guide Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside Power Door Mirrors (P122) ● With the power mode in ON, move the selector switch to L or R. ● Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror. ● Press the folding button * to fold in and out the door mirrors. ● Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time. (P162) Folding Button * Selector Switch Power Windows (P136) ● With the power mode in ON, open and close the power windows. ● If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger’s window can be opened and closed with its own switch. ● If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator is on), each passenger’s window switch is disabled. Power Window Lock Button Trunk (P 130) Adjustment Switch Window Switch Trunk Release Button ● Press the trunk release button to unlock and open the trunk when you are carrying the smart entry remote. 14 Indicator Climate Control System * (P188) Rear Climate Control * (P193) Models with navigation system The climate control system is voice operable. (P246) AUTO Button Driver’s Side Temperature Control Switch (Recirculation) Button Rear Temperature Control Buttons / (Rear Fan Control) Button Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Switch Quick Reference Guide ● Press the AUTO button to activate the rear climate control system. ● Press the button to turn the system on or off. ● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system. ● Press the button to turn the system on or off. ● Press the button to defrost the windshield. (On/Off) Button SYNC (Synchronized) Button MODE Button Air flows from dashboard and back of the centre console vents. Air flows from dashboard, floor and back of the centre console vents. Air flows from floor vents. Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents. (Windshield Defroster) Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button Fan Control Button Rear AUTO Button (Rear On/ Off) Button MODE Button Air flows from the rear console vents. Air flow from the rear console vents and floor vents. Air flows from the rear floor vents. * Not available on all models 15 Heating and Cooling System * (P195) Quick Reference Guide ● ● ● ● ● ● Toggle up and down the fan control switch to adjust the fan speed. Press the Mode button to select the vents air flows from. Toggle up and down the temperature control switch to adjust the temperature. Use the button for maximum cool setting. Press the button to turn the system on or off. Press the button to defrost the windshield. Fan Control Switch Temperature Control Switch (On/Off) Button (Recirculation) Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button MODE Button Air flows from dashboard vents. Air flows from dashboard and floor vents. Air flows from floor vents. Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents. 16 (Windshield Defroster) Button Button Features (P199) Quick Reference Guide Audio system (P200) Models with color audio system (Day/Night) Button Audio/Information Screen (Phone) Button RADIO Button (Sound) Button MEDIA Button VOL / Knob Selector Knob (Volume/Power) MENU/CLOCK Button / (Seek/Skip) Buttons (Back) Button Preset Buttons (1-6) * Not available on all models 17 Models with Display Audio For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual Quick Reference Guide /AUDIO (Power/Audio) Icon Multi-Information Display (Home) Icon VOL (Volume) Icons (Menu) Icon (Back) Icon (Day/night) Icon Audio/Information Screen Canadian models Disc Slot (Eject) Button 18 Audio Remote Controls (P205) / Button / Button Radio: Press to change the preset station. Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station. Quick Reference Guide (+ / (- Button ● CD */USB device: Press to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder. SOURCE Button ● (+ / (- Button Press to adjust the volume up/down. ● SOURCE Button Models with color audio system Press to change the audio mode: FM1/FM2/AM/USB/iPod/ Bluetooth® Audio/AUX Models with Display Audio Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/SiriusXM */CD */USB/iPod/ Pandora® */Bluetooth® Audio/AUX * Not available on all models 19 Driving (P411) Quick Reference Guide Automatic Transmission (P442) ● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. Shift Lever Release Button ● Shifting Park Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked. Reverse Used when reversing. Neutral Transmission is not locked. Drive Normal driving. D4 Button Low ● Strong engine power when climbing and strong engine braking when going down steep hills. Intelligent Traction Management Button Drive (D4) Press the D4 button while the shift lever is in (D . Used when: ● Going up or down hills. Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P . Move the shift lever without pressing the release button. Press the release button to move the shift lever. 20 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P482, 590) ● TPMS monitors tire pressure. ● TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine. ● TPMS fill assist provides audible and visual guidance during tire pressure adjustment. Cruise Control * (P447) Refueling (P514) Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher Fuel tank capacity: 19.5 US gal (73.8 L) a Press the fuel fill door release button. b After refueling, wait for about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle. Quick Reference Guide VSA® On and Off (P479) ● The Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. ● VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine. ● To partially disable or fully restore VSA® function, press and hold the button until you hear a beep. ● Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. ● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE button, then press the –/SET button once you have achieved the desired speed (above 25 mph or 40 km/h). CMBSTM On and Off (P497) ● When a possible collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision. ● To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep. * Not available on all models 21 Honda Sensing® * Quick Reference Guide Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located in the front grille and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rear view mirror. The camera is located behind the rearview mirror. Front Sensor Camera Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * (P457) Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator. Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * (P452) Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether. Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * (P470) Radar Sensor The radar sensor is inside the front grille. 22 Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane. Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * (P494) Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable. Maintenance (P519) ● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary. ● Check brake fluid. ● Check the battery condition monthly. a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the dashboard. b Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up the hood. c Quick Reference Guide Under the Hood (P527) Wiper Blades (P545) ● Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield. Tires (P547) Lights (P539) ● Inspect tires and wheels regularly. ● Check tire pressures regularly. ● Install snow tires for winter driving. ● Inspect all lights regularly. When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place. * Not available on all models 23 Handling the Unexpected Quick Reference Guide Flat Tire (P569) Engine Won’t Start (P578) Overheating (P585) ● Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire located in the trunk. ● If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery. ● Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down. Indicators Come On (P587) Blown Fuse (P591) Emergency Towing (P596) ● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate. ● Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. ● Identify the indicator and consult the owner’s manual. 24 (P567) What to Do If ● ● The steering wheel may be locked. Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button. The power mode does not change from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Why? The shift lever should be moved to (P . Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes? This can occur when the ABS activate and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal. u Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P492) Quick Reference Guide Canadian models The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY. Why? 25 Quick Reference Guide 26 The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why? Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, push the lever to the unlock position. Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors? If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security. Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver’s door? The beeper sounds when: ● The exterior lights are left on. ● The power mode is in ACCESSORY. Why does the beeper sound when I start driving? The beeper sounds when: ● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts. ● The parking brake pedal is not fully released. Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal? The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. Check tire pressure. u If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks (P590) Quick Reference Guide I’m seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that? 27 28 Safe Driving You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual. For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions.............. 30 Important Handling Information......... 32 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 33 Safety Checklist ................................. 34 Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts ........................ 35 Fastening a Seat Belt .......................... 38 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 41 Airbags Airbag System Components............... 42 Types of Airbags ................................ 45 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 45 Side Airbags....................................... 49 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 51 Airbag System Indicators.................... 52 Airbag Care ....................................... 54 Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 55 Safety of Infants and Small Children .... 57 Safety of Larger Children ................... 68 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 70 Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 71 29 For Safe Driving The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important. Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ■ Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly. ■ Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat. ■ Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual. ■ Don’t drink and drive Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either. 30 1Important Safety Precautions Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving. uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions ■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely ■ Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted. Safe Driving Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving. ■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance. ■ Never let passengers ride in the pickup bed or inside a truck cap (shell). They could be killed or injured in a crash, or become ill or even die from carbon monoxide poisoning if engine exhaust enters the cap. ■ Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle Children left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which the children and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in injury or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave children in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time. 31 uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information Important Handling Information Safe Driving 32 Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier. These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts. 1Important Handling Information For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read: 2 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle P. 440 2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 432 Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover. uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features Your Vehicle’s Safety Features 1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features 9 8 9 6 10 7 8 7 10 11 6 7 8 9 10 11 Safety Cage Crush Zones Seats and Seat-Backs Head Restraints Collapsible Steering Column Seat Belts Front Airbags Side Airbags Side Curtain Airbags Door Locks Seat Belt Tensioners Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash. Safe Driving Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash. However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly. The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers. 33 uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist Safety Checklist Safe Driving For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. • After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked. Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door. 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 121 • Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash. 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 163 • Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position. 2 Adjusting the front head restraint positions P. 168 • Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well. 2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 38 • Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height and weight. 2 Child Safety P. 55 34 1Safety Checklist If the door, trunk and/or tailgate open message appears on the multi-information display, the door, the trunk and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors, the trunk and the tailgate tightly until the message disappears. Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers ■ Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body. The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats. 2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 63 1About Your Seat Belts 3 WARNING Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags. Safe Driving Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly. 3 WARNING Allowing passengers to ride in the pickup bed or on the tailgate can result in death or serious injury in a crash. Make sure all passengers ride in a seat and wear a seat belt properly. Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury. Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts. If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly. Continued 35 uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts ■ Proper use of seat belts 1About Your Seat Belts Safe Driving Follow these guidelines for proper use: • All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. • Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash. • Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash. • Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. ■ Seat Belt Reminder The pickup bed is not equipped with seats or seat belts. Do not let anyone ride in the pickup bed as they can easily be thrown out and be killed or seriously injured. 1Seat Belt Reminder Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If the power mode is set to ON before the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver does not fasten the belt before the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on. The beeper will periodically sound and the indicator will blink while driving until the driver’s and/or the front passenger’s seat belt is fastened. 36 If a front and/or rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt. The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the power mode is set to ON. When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound. The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them. 2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 55 uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts ■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags. The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash. During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates. Safe Driving The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety. 1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners 37 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Fastening a Seat Belt After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat: 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 163 Safe Driving Pull out slowly. Correct Seated Posture. Buckle No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible. Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism. 2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything. Latch Plate 38 1. Pull the seat belt out slowly. 1Fastening a Seat Belt uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt ■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor 1Fastening a Seat Belt 3 WARNING Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash. Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving. Safe Driving Lap belt as low as possible 3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries. 4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body. To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door. 1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants. 1. Move the anchor up or down while squeezing the release buttons. Push 2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests Push across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. Continued The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time. After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure. 39 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt ■ Advice for Pregnant Women Safe Driving If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips. Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen. Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips. 40 1Advice for Pregnant Women Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive. To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag: • When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. • When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible. uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection Seat Belt Inspection Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows: 3 WARNING Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed. Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible. Safe Driving • Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. • Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract. 1Seat Belt Inspection Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision. 41 Airbags Airbag System Components 8 10 9 8 Safe Driving 12 6 7 8 8 11 8 42 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG. side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. d An electronic control unit that, when the vehicle is on, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, airbag activators, and seat belt tensioners. During a crash event the unit records such information. side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG. sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact. i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passenger’s front airbag has been turned off. j An indicator on the instrument panel that e Automatic front seat belt tensioners. In addition, the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened. b Two c Two h Impact Safe Driving The front, front side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes: alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners. k Safing Sensor lA fA driver’s seat position sensor. This sensor determines the optimal force at which the airbag will deploy in a crash. rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags. g Weight sensors in the front passenger’s seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be turned off if the weight on the seat is approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child). Continued 43 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components ■ Important Facts About Your Airbags Safe Driving Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly. What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible. Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy. Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates. Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate. 44 1Important Facts About Your Airbags Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection. When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover. uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags Types of Airbags 1Types of Airbags The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON. After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Safe Driving Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: • Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats. • Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs. • Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages. Front Airbags (SRS) The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary restraint system. ■ Housing Locations 1Front Airbags (SRS) During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes. The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG. Continued 45 uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) ■ Operation Safe Driving Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate. A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall. ■ How the Front Airbags Work While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest. The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls. The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them. 46 1How the Front Airbags Work Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) ■ When front airbags should not deploy Continued Safe Driving Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection. ■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. ■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed. 47 uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) ■ Advanced Airbags 1Advanced Airbags Safe Driving The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants. The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor. Driver’s Seat Position Sensor Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag. The front passenger’s advanced airbag system has weight sensors. Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors 48 We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s seat. However, if you do allow a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s seat, note that the system will automatically turn off the front passenger’s airbag if the sensors detect that the child is approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less. If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver’s seating position) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact. For the advanced airbags to work properly: • Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats. • Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat. • Make sure any objects are positioned properly on the floor. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors. • All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat belts properly. • Do not cover the passenger’s side dashboard with a cloth, towel, cover, etc. 2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 53 Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors. 2 Floor Mats P. 560 uuAirbagsuSide Airbags Side Airbags The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury. Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates. Safe Driving ■ Housing Locations 1Side Airbags Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact. Housing Location ■ Operation When inflated When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate. Side Airbag Continued 49 uuAirbagsuSide Airbags ■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Safe Driving 50 Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag. ■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed. uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags Side Curtain Airbags ■ Housing Locations The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle. 1Side Curtain Airbags If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners. If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle. Safe Driving The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and any passengers during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes. To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats. Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags. Side Curtain Airbag Storage ■ Operation The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact. Deployed Side Curtain Airbag Continued 51 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators ■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision. Safe Driving Airbag System Indicators If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the multi-information display. ■ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator 52 1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator ■ When the power mode is set to ON 3 WARNING The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly. Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly. If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem. uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators ■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator U.S. Canada ■ When the passenger airbag off Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors, such as: • An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket. • A child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat-back. • A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat. • The front seat or seat-back is forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it. • An object placed under the front passenger’s seat. Safe Driving indicator comes on The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger’s front airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the weight sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant or small child, on the seat. 1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator 2 Child Safety P. 55 Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on. If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on. If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible. The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and go off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold. 53 uuAirbagsuAirbag Care Airbag Care You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations: Safe Driving ■ When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced. ■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash. ■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9. 54 1Airbag Care We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit. Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under. Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: • An inflating front or side airbag can injure or kill a child sitting in the front seat. • A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver’s ability to safely control the vehicle. • Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat. Continued 3 WARNING Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash. Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary. Safe Driving To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle. 1Protecting Child Passengers The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride. 55 uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers • Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system. Safe Driving • Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision. • Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries. • Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash. • Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments. • Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly. 1Protecting Child Passengers 3 WARNING Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death. Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked. 3 WARNING Allowing a child to play on the pickup bed can result in serious injury or death by opening or closing the tailgate. To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way. To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle warning came with a label on the dashboard (U.S. models) and has labels on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels. 2 Safety Labels P. 71 56 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safety of Infants and Small Children ■ Protecting Infants 1Protecting Infants 3 WARNING Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash. Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front. Safe Driving An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is at least one year old. Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rearfacing seat. ■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position. Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a forward facing position. Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions before installation. When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it. Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position: The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant. It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system. 2 Airbags P. 42 If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat. Continued 57 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Protecting Smaller Children Safe Driving If a child is at least one year old and has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rearward facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward facing child seat. ■ Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position. 1Protecting Smaller Children 3 WARNING Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates. If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child. Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child. 58 Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat. uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Selecting a Child Seat 1Selecting a Child Seat Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple. LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation. Safe Driving Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety. In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual for proper installation instructions. ■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: • The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. • The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. • The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. Continued 59 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat Safe Driving A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in any of the three rear seating position. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the flexible or rigid type of connectors. 1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks. 2. Make sure there are no objects near the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child seat and the Marks anchors. Center position Upper Guide Center Tether Anchorage Point 60 Center position 3. Lower the head restraint to its lowest position. 4. Lift the upper guide cover, then route the tether strap around the upper guide. 5. Route the tether strap downward properly, then attach the strap hook to the center tether anchor. u Making sure the strap is not twisted. 1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat 3 WARNING Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. For your child’s safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants. uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children All positions Lower Anchors 1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat Flexible Type 3 WARNING Do not use the lower inner anchors of the outer rear seats to secure a LATCHcompatible child seat to the rear center seat, unless the manufacturer’s instructions for that system permit the use of inner anchors with the stated spacing. Safe Driving 6. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the rear center seat Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower anchors which are used to secure a LATCH-compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however, is not equipped with anchors of any kind. The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance between the two inner anchors is 21.7 inches (550 mm). LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the rear center seat. However, a system fitted with flexible-type attachments can be installed in the center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s instructions for that system permit the use of the inner anchors with the stated spacing. Before seating a child, make sure that the system is properly attached to both the lower anchors and tether anchors. Rigid Type Continued 61 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Outer positions Upper Guide Safe Driving Outer Tether Anchorage Points Outer positions Upper Guide Outer Tether Anchorage Points Outer positions 7. Put the outer head restraint to it’s uppermost position (or remove it), then route the tether strap over the seat-back and through the head restraint legs. 8. Lift the upper guide cover, then route the tether strap around the upper guide. 9. Route the tether strap downward properly, then attach the strap hook to the tether anchor under the seat. See the label. u Making sure the strap is not twisted. All positions 10. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. 11. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt. 12. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked. 2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 55 62 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt 1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants. Safe Driving A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat. 1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. 2. Route the seat belt through the child seat according to the seat manufacturer’s instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks. 3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor. 4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and check that the retractor has switched modes by pulling on the webbing. It should not pull out again until it is reset by removing the latch plate from the buckle. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 3 – 4. Continued 63 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe Driving 5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat. 6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt. 7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked. 2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 55 64 1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way. uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Adding Security with a Tether Covers Upper Guides 1Adding Security with a Tether Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is available. Always use a tether for forward facing child seats when using the seat belt or lower anchors. Safe Driving A tether anchorage point is provided at each outside of the seat bottom and between the lower anchors of the rear center seat. If you have a child restraint system that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security. Outer Tether Anchorage Points Center Tether Anchorage Point Continued 65 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Upper Guide Safe Driving Outer Tether Anchorage Points 66 ■ Using an outer anchor 1. Put the outer head restraint to it’s uppermost position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs. 2. Lift the cover, then hook the tether strap through the upper guide as shown. 3. Route the tether strap downward properly, making sure the strap is not twisted. 4. Attach the tether strap hook to the outer tether anchor on the outside of the seat bottom. 5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Upper Guide 1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest position. 2. Route the tether strap over the seat-back, lift the cover, then hook the tether strap through the upper guide as shown. 3. Route the tether strap downward properly along the seat-back, making sure the strap is not twisted. 4. Attach the tether strap hook to the center tether anchor between the lower anchors for the LATCH-compatible child seat. 5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. 1Using the center anchor Make sure to attach the tether strap hook to the anchor before installing the child seat, because the tether anchor is positioned behind the child seat. Safe Driving Center Tether Anchorage Point ■ Using the center anchor 67 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children Safety of Larger Children ■ Protecting Larger Children Safe Driving The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front. ■ Checking Seat Belt Fit When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions. ■ Checklist • Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat? • Does the shoulder belt cross between the child’s neck and arm? • Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs? • Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat. 68 1Safety of Larger Children 3 WARNING Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates. If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed. uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children ■ Booster Seats 1Booster Seats When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly. Safe Driving If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in a rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer’s recommendations. Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. six years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive. ■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: • Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information in this manual. • Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. • Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. • Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat. ■ Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly. 69 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior. Safe Driving ■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever • The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. • The exhaust system may have been damaged. • The vehicle is raised for an oil change. 1Carbon Monoxide Gas 3 WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you. Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide. An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine. 70 Safety Labels Label Locations These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully. Sun Visor U.S. models Canadian models Safe Driving If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement. Sun Visor U.S. models only Dashboard U.S. models only Air Conditioner System U.S. models Canadian models Radiator Cap Continued 71 uuSafety LabelsuLabel Locations U.S. models Safe Driving Canadian models Pickup bed 72 Instrument Panel This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving. Indicators ............................................ 74 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages...................... 91 Gauges and Multi-Information Display Gauges............................................ 103 Multi-Information Display ................ 104 73 Indicators Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Instrument Panel U.S. Canada ● Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red) ● ● (Red) ● ● U.S. ● Canada (Amber) 74 Brake System Indicator (Amber) Explanation Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off if the parking brake has been released. Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released. Comes on when the brake fluid level is low. Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system. The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if you drive with the parking brake not fully released. ● Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on if there is a problem with a system related to braking other than the conventional brake system. ● Message Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid level. 2 What to do when the indicator comes on while driving P. 589 ● Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On P. 589 ● Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability. U.S. Canada uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Low Oil Pressure Indicator ● Malfunction Indicator Lamp ● ● ● Charging System Indicator * Not available on all models ● Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off when the engine starts. Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. ● Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off either when the engine starts or after several seconds if the engine did not start. If “readiness codes” have not been set, it blinks five times before it goes off. Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control systems. Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s cylinders is detected. ● Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics for the emissions control systems. ● Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down. Then, take your vehicle to a dealer. Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off when the engine starts. Comes on when the battery is not charging. ● Message Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place. 2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 587 Instrument Panel ● Explanation 2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 607 ● 2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 588 Comes on while driving - Turn off the climate control system */heating and cooling system * and rear defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption. 2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 587 Continued 75 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Shift Lever Position Indicator On/Blinking ● Indicates the current shift lever position. 2 Shifting P. 442 Instrument Panel ● Blinks if the transmission system has a problem. ● Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. ● Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you set the power mode to ON. If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on about a few seconds later. Blinks while driving if either you or the front passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals. ● The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the front passenger fasten their seat belts. Stays on after you or the front passenger has fastened the seat belt A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Transmission Indicator ● Seat Belt Reminder Indicator ● 76 Explanation ● 2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 36 Message — uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator ● ● ● Supplemental Restraint System Indicator ● Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 2.5 U.S. gal./9.5 L left). Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge. ● Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the ABS. ● Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner ● ● Message Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible. Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Instrument Panel Low Fuel Indicator ● Explanation Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function. 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 492 Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Continued 77 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● ● Instrument Panel 78 Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) System Indicator ● Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Blinks when VSA®, or trailer stability assist is active. Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA®, hill start assist, trailer stability assist or brake lighting system. Explanation ● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 478 2 Trailer Stability Assist P. 429 2 Hill start assist system P. 439 ● When Trailer Stability Assist Problem is displayed on the multi-information display, the VSA® does not activate. Message uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Comes on when VSA® OFF switch is pressed. ● Message — — Appears when Normal or Snow Mode is selected. Instrument Panel ● Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Explanation 2 VSA® On and Off P. 479 AWD models Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®) OFF Indicator ● ● Comes on when Mud/Sand mode is selected by pressing Intelligent Traction Management System switch. Appears when Mud Mode is selected. 2 Intelligent Traction Management P. 445 ● Appears when Sand Mode is selected. 2 Intelligent Traction Management P. 445 ● Appears when Mud or Sand Mode is selected. To turn VSA® on, select Normal or Snow. 2 Intelligent Traction Management P. 445 Continued 79 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Instrument Panel ● ● Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators High Beam Indicator 80 ● ● ● ● ● Explanation Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off when the engine starts. Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system. ● Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on if the tire pressure of any of the tires becomes significantly low. Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS with Tire Fill Assist, or when a compact spare tire is temporarily installed. ● Blinks when you operate the turn signal lever. Blink when you press the hazard warning button. ● Comes on when the high beam headlights are on. Message Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 589 ● Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary. Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as you can. Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately. — 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 542, 543 — — uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Lights On Indicator On/Blinking ● Auto high-beam Indicator * Fog Light Indicator * ● ● ● Immobilizer System Indicator ● ● Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on when all the operating conditions of the Auto highbeam are met. Comes on when the fog lights are on. Comes on briefly when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information. ● ● * Not available on all models If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened. — 2 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) * P. 151 — — ● Message Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then select the ON mode again. Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur. Instrument Panel ● Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in AUTO when the exterior lights are on. Explanation — — Continued 81 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Security System Alarm Indicator Explanation Blinks when the security system alarm has been set. 2 Security System Alarm P. 133 Message — Indicator Instrument Panel 82 ● ● System Message Indicator CRUISE MAIN Indicator * ● CRUISE CONTROL Indicator * ● * Not available on all models Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on along with a beep when a problem is detected. A system message on the multiinformation display appears at the same time. ● ● ● While the indicator is on, press the (information) button to see the message again. Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter when a system message appears on the multi-information display. Take the appropriate action for the message. The multi-information display does not return to the normal screen unless the warning is canceled, or the button is pressed. — Comes on when you press the CRUISE button. 2 Cruise Control * P. 447 — Comes on when you have set a speed for cruise control. 2 Cruise Control * P. 447 — uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● ● ● ● All-wheel drive (AWD) Indicator * ● Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on as soon as a problem is detected in the smart entry system * or keyless starting system. ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on if there is a problem with the AWD system. Blinks when the differential temperature is too high. ● Stays on constantly - The engine drives the front wheels only in this state. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. ● Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place, change to (P , and idle the engine until the indicator goes off. If the indicator does not stop blinking, take your vehicle to a dealer. Message * Instrument Panel Smart Entry System Indicator Explanation 2 Intelligent Variable Torque ManagementTM (i-VTM4TM) AWD System * P. 481 * Not available on all models Continued 83 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● ● Instrument Panel ● Explanation Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on if there is a problem with the RDM system. ● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Comes on when the RDM system shuts itself off. ● Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system */heating and cooling system * to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down. Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator * 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 ● ● Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message come back on after you cleaned the area around the camera. 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 84 * Not available on all models Message uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● ● ● ● ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Green) * Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on if there is a problem with ACC. ● Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Comes on if anything covers the radar sensor cover and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in front. May come on when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.) ACC has been automatically canceled. ● When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover. ● Comes on when you press the MAIN button. ● Comes on if the temperature inside the camera is too high. ACC has been automatically canceled. ● ● 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * P. 457 ● ● Message Instrument Panel Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber) * Explanation — Use the climate control system */heating and cooling system * to cool down the camera. Goes off - The camera has been cooled down. Pressing the MAIN button can resume the system. 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * P. 457 * Not available on all models Continued 85 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Instrument Panel Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber) * Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Green) * On/Blinking ● ● * Not available on all models ● ● Comes on when you press the MAIN button. ● Comes on when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS button is pressed, but the temperature inside the front sensor camera is too high. The LKAS cancels automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously. ● Comes on when the area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. May come on when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.) ● ● ● 86 Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on if there is a problem with the LKAS. Explanation Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * P. 470 ● Message Use the climate control system */heating and cooling system * to cool down the camera. Goes off - The camera has been cooled down and the system activates normally. 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message come back on after you cleaned the area around the camera. — uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● ● ECON Mode Indicator * Not available on all models Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Stays on while BSI is turned off. — Comes on when mud, snow, or ice accumulates in the vicinity of sensor. ● ● Comes on if there is a problem with the system. ● ● Comes on when you press the ECON button. ● Message Instrument Panel Blind spot information (BSI) Indicator * Explanation Comes on while driving - Remove the obstacle in the vicinity of sensor. 2 Blind spot information (BSI) System * P. 486 Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 ECON Button P. 444 Continued 87 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Instrument Panel 88 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator * ● ● * Not available on all models Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off. Comes on when you deactivate the CMBSTM. A multi-information display message appears for five seconds. Comes on if there is a problem with the CMBSTM. Explanation ● Stays on constantly without the CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * P. 494 Message uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Comes on when the CMBSTM system shuts itself off. Explanation ● Message Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator * ● Instrument Panel ● When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover. 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * P. 494 ● Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system */heating and cooling system * to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down. 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 * Not available on all models Continued 89 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Instrument Panel 90 Bed Lights On Indicator ● Comes on when the bed lights are on. Comes on for 30 minutes when you set power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) without turning off the bed lights, then goes off. Explanation 2 Bed Lights P. 186 Message — uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the with the system message indicator on. Message Condition ● Explanation ● Goes off when all the doors, the trunk and the tailgate are closed. Instrument Panel Appears if a door, the trunk or the tailgate*1 is not completely closed. (information) button to see the message again *1:When the tailgate is dropped open, the message does not appear. Continued 91 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Message Condition ● ● Instrument Panel Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on the battery. ● Appears along with the battery charging system indicator when the battery is not charging. ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Checking the Battery P. 556 Turn off the climate control system */heating and cooling system * and rear defogger to reduce electricity consumption. 2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 587 ● ● ● 92 Explanation Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and Maintenance Past Due follow. Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets abnormally high. * Not available on all models 2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the MultiInformation Display P. 524 2 Overheating P. 585 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Message U.S. Condition ● Appears when the starter system has a problem. Explanation ● Hold the ENGINE START/STOP button up to 15 seconds to start the engine. 2 Starting the Engine P. 434 Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Instrument Panel Canada Canadian models ● Appears when the steering wheel is locked. ● Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY. ● Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button. — Continued 93 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Message Condition Explanation Instrument Panel ● Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the power mode is in ACCESSORY. ● Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). ● Appears when you close the door with the power mode is in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle. ● Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back inside the vehicle and close the door. Appears when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak. ● Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too weak to start the engine or the key is not within operating range to start the engine. The beeper sounds six times. ● Appears three seconds after the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button, then To Start Engine messages appeared sequentially. ● ● ● ● 2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 144 Replace the battery as soon as possible. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 557 Bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 579 Unless you bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button, this message does not appear. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 579 94 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Message Condition Explanation Appears if there is a problem with the cooling system. ● Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible. ● Appears when the transmission system temperature is too high. ● Stop in a safe place and move the shift lever to (P . Let the engine idle until the message disappears. ● Appears if the shift lever is in a position other than (P and you press the ENGINE START/STOP button to turn the engine off. ● ● Appears when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. ● Move the shift lever to (P and then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice. Instrument Panel ● 2 Starting the Engine P. 434 Continued 95 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Message Condition ● AWD models Explanation Appears when pressing the Intelligent Traction Management button. Instrument Panel 2 Intelligent Traction Management P. 445 2WD models Models with LED low beam headlights Message Condition ● 96 Appears if there is a problem with the headlights. Explanation ● Appears while driving - The low beam headlights may not be on. When conditions allow you to drive safety, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible. uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Models with parking sensor Message Condition Explanation Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor system. ● Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on or the beeper does not stop even after you clean the area, have the system checked by a dealer. ● Appears if there are obstacles around the sensors. ● Check for obstacles near your vehicle to make sure it is safe to park. Continued Instrument Panel ● 97 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Models with ACC Message Condition ● Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with a vehicle in front of you. Explanation ● Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.) Instrument Panel 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * P. 494 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * P. 457 ● Appears when ACC has been automatically canceled. ● You can resume the set speed after the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+/SET/– button. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * P. 457 Models with washer level sensor Message Condition ● Appears when the washer fluid is low. Explanation ● Refill washer fluid. 2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 538 98 * Not available on all models uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Models with remote engine start Message Condition ● Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s door while the engine is running by the smart entry remote. Explanation 2 Remote Engine Start * P. 436 Instrument Panel * Not available on all models Continued 99 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Models with LKAS Message Condition ● Instrument Panel 100 Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected lane. Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel. Explanation ● ● Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. The color of either line changes from white to amber as the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * P. 470 When you selected Warning Only ● Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane. ● ● 2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * P. 452 When you selected Normal or Wide ● Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel with steering assist when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane. ● Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper sounds simultaneously. * Not available on all models Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. The color of either line changes from white to amber as the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line. ● Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS. uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Models with LKAS Message Condition ● ● ● Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS button is pressed, but there is a problem with a system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously if selected by customization. ● Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS button is pressed, but there the temperature inside the LKAS camera is too high. The LKAS cancels automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously if selected by customization. ● Appears when the area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the camera area of the windshield with a soft cloth. May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.) ● * Not available on all models If any other system indicators come on, such as the VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action. 2 Indicators P. 74 ● Use the climate control system */heating and cooling system * to cool down the camera. Goes off - The camera has been cooled down. Pressing the LKAS button can resume the system. Instrument Panel ● Explanation 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message come back on after you cleaned the area around the camera. Continued 101 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Models with Auto high-beam Message Condition ● Instrument Panel 102 Appears if there is a problem with the Auto high-beam (High Beam Support System). Explanation ● ● Manually operate the headlight switch. If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams. 2 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) * P. 151 ● Appears when the area around the camera on the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. ● ● * Not available on all models Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the camera area of the windshield with a soft cloth. If the message does not disappear after cleaning the lens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Gauges and Multi-Information Display Gauges Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when the power mode is in ON. ■ Speedometer Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada). Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute. ■ Fuel Gauge Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank. Press and hold the RESET button until you hear a beep when the blank appears on the multiinformation display. The speedometer reading as well as the displayed measurements will switch between mph and km/h. The display change message will switch for a few seconds. 1Fuel Gauge Instrument Panel ■ Tachometer 1Speedometer NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter. The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading. ■ Temperature Gauge Displays the temperature of the engine coolant. 1Temperature Gauge NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal. 2 Overheating P. 585 103 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display Multi-Information Display The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator *, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information. ■ Switching the Display Instrument Panel Press the (information) or RESET button. Trip A Blank Trip B Distance/ Distance/ Average Fuel Economy/ Average Fuel Economy/ Range/Instant Fuel Range/Instant Fuel Economy Economy Button RESET Button Engine Oil Life Press the Press and hold the RESET Changed two seconds later 104 * Not available on all models Tire Pressure for Each Tire Compass * Turn-by-Turn Directions * uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display Outside temperature * Instrument Panel Odometer ■ Odometer Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has accumulated. * Not available on all models Continued 105 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display ■ Outside Temperature * Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada). Models with Display Audio ■ Adjusting the outside temperature display Instrument Panel Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect. 1Outside Temperature * The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h). It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized. Models with Display Audio Use the audio/information screen’s customized features to correct the temperature. 2 Customized Features P. 318 ■ Trip Meter Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips. 1Trip Meter Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the button. ■ Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the RESET button until the trip meter is reset to 0.0. ■ Average Fuel Economy Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset. 106 * Not available on all models 1Average Fuel Economy Models with Display Audio You can change when to reset the average fuel economy. 2 Customized Features P. 318 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display ■ Range Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips. ■ Instant Fuel Economy Instrument Panel Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). ■ Tire Pressure Monitor Shows each tire’s pressure. 2 TPMS with Tire Fill Assist P. 482 ■ Maintenance MinderTM Shows the Maintenance MinderTM information. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 523 Models with navigation system ■ Turn-by-Turn Directions Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the navigation system. 2 Refer to the navigation system 1Turn-by-Turn Directions The multi-information display shows a compass when the route guidance is not used. You can select whether the turn-by-turn display comes on or not during the route guidance. 2 Customized Features P. 318 2 Refer to the navigation system 107 108 Controls This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving. Clock .................................................. 110 Locking and Unlocking the Doors Key Types and Functions .................. 111 Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength... 113 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside .......................................... 114 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ............................................. 121 Childproof Door Locks ..................... 123 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 124 Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 128 Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 130 Security System Immobilizer System .......................... 133 Security System Alarm...................... 133 * Not available on all models Opening and Closing the Windows .... 136 Opening and Closing the Moonroof * ... 140 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 142 Turn Signals ..................................... 145 Light Switches.................................. 146 Fog Lights * ...................................... 149 Daytime Running Lights ................... 150 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) * ........................................ 151 Wipers and Washers ........................ 154 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button ........................................... 156 Canadian models Heated Windshield Button ............... 156 Brightness Control ........................... 157 Driving Position Memory System * .... 158 Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 160 Adjusting the Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 161 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 162 Adjusting the Seats .......................... 163 Interior Lights/Convenience Items Interior Lights .................................. 171 Interior Convenience Items .............. 173 In-Bed Convenience Items................ 184 Climate Control System * .................. 188 Heating and Cooling System * ......... 195 109 Clock Adjusting the Clock You can adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen, with the power mode in ON. ■ Adjusting the Time Models with color audio system Controls 1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Select Adjust Clock, then press . 3. Rotate to adjust the hours. 4. Press to switch to minute adjustment. 5. Rotate to adjust the minutes. 6. Press to switch to Set. 7. Press to complete clock adjustment. Models with Display Audio 1. Select , then select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info, then Clock Adjustment. 3. Adjust the dates, hours and minutes by selecting 3 / 4 . 4. Select OK to set the time. 110 1Clock Models with color audio system These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter. To change the setting between 12h and 24h: 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Clock Format, then press . 4. Rotate to select 12h or 24h, then press . Models with navigation system The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted. All models You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock. 2 Customized Features P. 318 Locking and Unlocking the Doors Key Types and Functions This vehicle comes with the following keys: Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and Models with remote engine start to lock or unlock all the doors or open the trunk. 1Key Types and Functions All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft. 2 Immobilizer System P. 133 Models without remote engine start Controls The keys contain precision electronics. Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to the electronics: • Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in locations with high temperature or high humidity. • Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. • Keep the keys away from liquids. • Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the battery. If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the smart entry system may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer. Models with remote engine start You can remotely start the engine using the remote engine start. 2 Remote Engine Start * P. 436 * Not available on all models Continued 111 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions ■ Smart entry remote Built-in Key Controls Release Knob The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors or open the trunk when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak or the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled. To remove the built-in key, slide the release knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall the built-in key, push the built-in key into the smart entry remote until it clicks. ■ Key Number Tag 1Key Number Tag Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key. Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer. If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer. 112 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/ unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine. In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: • Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. • You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. • A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote. 1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength Communication between the smart entry remote and the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s battery. The smart entry remote battery lasts about two years. This changes by how often you use the remote. The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers. Controls 113 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System * When you carry the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors or open the trunk. Controls You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle. You can open the trunk within about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk release button. 1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior light comes on when you unlock the doors. No doors opened: The light fades out after 30 seconds. Doors relocked: The light goes off immediately. 2 Interior Lights P. 171 1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System * If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the smart entry system, the doors will automatically relock. You can lock or unlock doors using the smart entry system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF. 114 * Not available on all models uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside Door Lock Button ■ Locking the doors 1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System * Press the door lock button on a front door. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all the doors lock; and the security system sets. • Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you. • Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, • • • • • * Not available on all models Continued Controls • you can lock or unlock the doors or open the trunk while someone else with the remote is within range. The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the smart entry remote is within range. If you grip a door handle wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors. After locking the door, wait at least two seconds before unlocking it by gripping the handle. The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle. Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart entry remote if it is above or below the outside handle. The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too close to the door and door glass. 115 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Unlocking the doors and trunk Controls Trunk Release Button Grab the driver’s door handle: u The driver’s door unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice. Grab the front passenger’s door handle: u All doors unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice. Press the trunk release button: u The trunk unlocks and opens. u The beeper sounds once. 2 Using the Trunk Release Button P. 131 116 * Not available on all models 1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System * Models with Display Audio The light flash, beep and door unlock mode settings can be customized using the audio/information screen. 2 Customized Features P. 318 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto a b * Not available on all models Continued 1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock) * The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the audio/information screen. 2 Customized Features P. 318 After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the smart entry remote will continue to flash until the doors are locked. When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds. Controls The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m) lock) * When you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the smart entry remote, the doors will automatically lock. The auto lock function activates when all doors and trunk are closed, and the smart entry remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle. Exit vehicle while carrying smart entry remote and close door(s). 1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the vehicle. u The beeper sounds; the auto lock function will be activated. 2. Carry the smart entry remote beyond about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all doors will then lock. When you open a door after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be canceled. When all doors and trunk have been closed and the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle, or if the smart entry remote is not detected within about 5 feet (1.5 m) of the vehicle, auto lock function will not be activated. 117 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside To temporarily deactivate the function: 1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). 2. Open the driver’s door. 3. Using the master door lock switch, operate the lock as follows: Lock Unlock Lock Unlock. u The beeper sounds and the function is deactivated. Controls 118 To restore the function: • Set the power mode to ON. • Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock function • Open or close the door. * Not available on all models 1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock) * The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met. • The smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. • A door or the hood is not closed. • The power mode is set to any mode other than OFF. • The smart entry remote is not located within a radius of about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors. Auto lock function operation stop beeper After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases. • The smart entry remote is put inside the vehicle through a window. • You are located too close to the vehicle. • The smart entry remote is put inside the trunk. If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the smart entry remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once. uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Using the Remote Transmitter ■ Locking the doors LED Unlock Button Lock Button Lock Button Press the lock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors lock, and the security system sets. Twice (within five seconds after the first push): u Some exterior lights flash, the beeper sounds and verifies the security system is set. ■ Unlocking the doors Press the unlock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks. Twice: u Some exterior lights flash twice, the remaining doors unlock. If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock. Models with Display Audio You can change the relock timer setting. 2 Customized Features P. 318 You can lock or unlock the doors using the remote transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF. The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings. Controls LED Unlock Button 1Using the Remote Transmitter The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open. If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 557 Models with Display Audio You can customize the door lock mode and keyless lock acknowledgement setting. 2 Customized Features P. 318 Continued 119 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key If the smart entry remote battery or the vehicle battery is dead, use the key instead of the smart entry remote. Fully insert the key and turn it. Lock 1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the other doors and trunk lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the trunk. Models with Display Audio You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 318 Controls Unlock ■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key ■ Locking the front doors Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door. ■ Locking the rear doors Push the lock tab forward and close the door. ■ Lockout prevention system The doors cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. 120 1Locking a Door Without Using a Key When you lock the driver’s door or the passenger’s door, all the other doors lock at the same time. Make sure you have the key in your hand when you lock the driver’s door, any of the other doors or the trunk, otherwise you may end up locking the key inside the vehicle. uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ■ Using the Lock Tab To Lock Lock Tab 1Using the Lock Tab When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, all the other doors lock at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock. ■ Locking a door Push the lock tab forward. ■ Unlocking a door To Unlock Pull the lock tab rearward. Controls Continued 121 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ■ Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle Pull the front door inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one motion. Inner Handle Controls Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors. To avoid unlocking all the doors, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door. u This setting works for one time only. Models with Display Audio If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the audio/information screen. 122 1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However, this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion. Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided. 2 Childproof Door Locks P. 123 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks ■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch Press the master door lock switch on either front door to lock or unlock all the doors. Master Door Lock Switch 1Using the Master Door Lock Switch When you lock or unlock either front door using the master door lock switch, all the other doors lock or unlock at the same time. To Lock To Unlock Controls Childproof Door Locks The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. ■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door. 1Childproof Door Locks To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle. ■ When opening the door Open the door using the outside door handle. Unlock Lock 123 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met. 1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Models with Display Audio ■ Auto Door Locking ■ Drive lock mode All doors and trunk lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h). ■ Auto Door Unlocking Controls 124 ■ Driver’s door open mode All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened. You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the audio/ information screen. 2 Customized Features P. 318 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting * Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting* You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch. ■ List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options ■ Auto door locking Mode Description All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h). Off The auto door locking is deactivated all the time. Controls Drive Lock Mode*1 ■ Auto door unlocking Mode Description Driver’s Door Open Mode*1 All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened. Park Unlock Mode All doors unlock when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed. Off The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time. *1:Default setting * Not available on all models Continued 125 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting * ■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options Steps Drive Lock Mode*1 1 Apply the parking brake. Apply the parking brake. 2 Close the driver’s door. Open the driver’s door. 3 Set the power mode to ON. Set the power mode to ON. Controls Press and hold the lock side of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door Press and hold the lock side of the master door for more than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear a click twice. lock switch on the driver’s door for more than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear one click. 4 5 Set the power mode to ACCESSORY within 20 seconds. u Customization is completed. *1:Default setting 126 Off uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting * ■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options Steps Driver’s Door Open Mode*1 Park Unlock Mode Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to (P . Off 1 Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever out of (P . Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to (P . 2 Close the driver’s door. Open the driver’s door. 3 Set the power mode to ON. Set the power mode to ON. Controls Press and hold the unlock side of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear a click twice. 4 5 Set the power mode to ACCESSORY within 20 seconds. u Customization is completed. *1:Default setting 127 Opening and Closing the Tailgate Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it. ■ Opening the tailgate • Support the tailgate with your hands until it has completely opened. • Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close when it is in the swing open position. ■ Closing the tailgate 1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate 3 WARNING Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate that is being opened or closed can be seriously injured. Make sure that all people are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it. Controls Unless absolutely necessary, close the tailgate before driving. Be careful not to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the tailgate. When you are storing or picking up luggage from the cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned. 3 WARNING Allowing passengers to ride in the pickup bed or on the tailgate can result in death or serious injury in a crash. Make sure all passengers ride in a seat and wear a seat belt properly. 128 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuUsing the Tailgate Release Handle Using the Tailgate Release Handle ■ Drop Open the Tailgate Upper handle 1Using the Tailgate Release Handle Pull up the upper handle to drop open the tailgate. u Make sure to hold the tailgate until it is fully opened. 1Swing Open the Tailgate Pull up the lower handle to swing open the tailgate. Controls ■ Swing Open the Tailgate NOTICE As a safety feature, the upper handle is disabled if you do not fully close the tailgate after it is swung open. Likewise, the lower handle is disabled if you do not fully close the tailgate after it is dropped open. The tailgate can be swing open in two steps. Lower handle The bed lights comes on when you swing open the tailgate. 129 Opening and Closing the Trunk Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk ■ Opening the trunk Open the trunk all the way. u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight. ■ Closing the trunk Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to: u Avoid possible damage. Controls 130 Using the key If the smart entry remote battery or the vehicle battery is dead, use the key instead of the smart entry remote. 1. Swing open the tailgate. 2. Fully insert the key and turn it. 3. Open the trunk. 1Opening and Closing the Trunk 3 WARNING Swinging the tailgate open or closed while anyone is in its path can cause serious injury. Make sure all passengers are clear of the tailgate’s path before opening or closing it. uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button Using the Trunk Release Button Push up the trunk release button on the trunk lid after all the doors are unlocked. Trunk Release Button 1Using the Trunk Release Button • If you forget the remote inside, the beeper will sound and the trunk will not close. Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the trunk if you carry the smart entry remote. u The beeper will sound. • A person who is not carrying the smart entry Controls remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is carrying it is within range. • Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the trunk cannot be closed. • Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk lid when closing it. Trunk Main Switch Trunk Main Switch ON OFF The trunk main switch disables the trunk release button on the trunk lid to protect luggage in the trunk. 1. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove box. 2. Lock the glove box. 1Trunk Main Switch If you need to give the key to someone else, remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote by sliding the release knob, and give the remote as a valet key. 131 uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener Emergency Trunk Opener The trunk release lever allows you to open the trunk from inside for your safety. Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow. Lever Controls 132 1Emergency Trunk Opener Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature. Security System Immobilizer System The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key. NOTICE Leaving the smart entry remote in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended. Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable. Controls Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button: • Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/ STOP button. • Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. • Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ENGINE START/STOP button. • Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device such as televisions and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic. 1Immobilizer System Security System Alarm The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not go off if the trunk or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or smart entry with push button start system. However, the alarm goes off if a door is opened with the key and the shift lever is moved out of (P or the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON. 1Security System Alarm Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable. The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates. ■ When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently, some exterior lights flash. Continued 133 uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm ■ To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry with push button start system. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated. ■ Setting the security system alarm Controls The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: • The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). • The hood and trunk are closed. • All doors are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system. ■ When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set. ■ To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key, remote transmitter, smart entry system, or the power mode is set to ON. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time. 134 1Security System Alarm Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when: • Unlocking the door with the lock tab. • Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the emergency trunk opener. • Opening the hood with the hood release. • Moving the shift lever out of (P . If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system. uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm ■ Panic Mode ■ The panic button on the remote Panic Button transmitter If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: • The horn sounds. • Some exterior lights flash. Press any button on the remote transmitter, or set the power mode to ON. Controls ■ Canceling panic mode 135 Opening and Closing the Windows Opening/Closing the Power Windows The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat. Controls When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle. ■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function ON OFF Power Window Lock Button ■ Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. Indicator ■ Automatic operation (front windows) To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly. Driver’s Window Switch Front Passenger’s Window Switch 136 The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly. 1Opening/Closing the Power Windows 3 WARNING Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury. Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them. The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Opening either front door cancels this function. Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction. The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch. The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows ■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function Front To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up. Close Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position. Controls Open Rear Close Open Continued 137 uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows ■ Opening/Closing Back Window * To open: Pull the switch back. To close: Push the switch forward. Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position. Open Controls Close ■ Opening Windows and the Moonroof * with the Remote To open: Press the unlock button, and then within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it. Unlock Button 138 * Not available on all models If the windows and Moonroof * stop midway, repeat the procedure. 1Opening/Closing Back Window * This switch opens and closes the back window only. uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows ■ Opening/Closing Windows and the Moonroof * with the Key To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there. Close Open Controls To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the lock direction and hold it there. Release the key to stop the windows and the moonroof * at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation. * Not available on all models 139 Opening and Closing the Moonroof * ■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof. ■ Automatic operation To open: Pull the switch back firmly. To close: Push the switch forward firmly. Open Controls The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, push the switch briefly. Close Tilt 1Opening/Closing the Moonroof 3 CAUTION Opening or closing the moonroof on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury. Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it. NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor. The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Opening either front door cancels this function. 140 * Not available on all models uuOpening and Closing the Moonroof * u ■ Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. ■ Tilting the moonroof up * Not available on all models When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof. You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof. 2 Opening Windows and the Moonroof * with the Remote P. 138 2 Opening/Closing Windows and the Moonroof * with the Key P. 139 Controls To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release. 1Opening/Closing the Moonroof 141 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel ENGINE START/STOP Button ■ Changing the Power Mode *2 VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) The button is off. The steering wheel is locked*1. The power to all electrical components is turned off. Controls ACCESSORY The button blinks (in red). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position. Without pressing the brake pedal ON The button is on in red. All electrical components can be used. Press the button. Press the button without the shift lever in (P . Shift to (P *2. Shift to (P , then press the button. *1:Canadian models *2:U.S. models 142 1ENGINE START/STOP Button ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range You can start the engine when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. Operating Range If the smart entry remote battery is weak, beeper sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the multi-information display. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 579 The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle. ON mode: The ENGINE START/STOP button is red when the engine is running. uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button ■ Automatic Power Off 1ENGINE START/STOP Button If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery. Canadian models Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out. Controls When in this mode: The steering wheel does not lock. You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry system. Canadian models If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP button while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). ■ Power Mode Reminder If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning beep sounds. Continued 143 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button ■ Smart Entry Remote Reminder Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/ or outside the vehicle to remind you that the smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the buzzer continues even after the remote is put back inside, place it within its operational range. Controls ■ When the power mode is in ON If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed, a warning buzzer sounds from both inside and outside the vehicle. Furthermore, a warning message on the multi-information display notifies the driver inside that the remote outside of the vehicle. ■ When the power mode is in ACCESSORY If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and/or all the doors are closed, a warning buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle. 144 1Smart Entry Remote Reminder When the smart entry remote is within the system’s operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the warning function cancels. If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button. Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer. Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the system’s operational range. uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals Turn Signals Right Turn The turn signals can be used when the power mode is in ON. ■ One-touch turn signal Left Turn When you lightly push up or down and release the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals and turn signal indicator blink three times. This feature can be used when signaling for a lane change. Controls 145 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches Light Switches ■ Manual Operation High Beams Controls 146 Flashing the high beams Low Beams Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights 1Light Switches Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting. ■ High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click. ■ Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams. ■ Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it. If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the lights on, a light on reminder chime sounds when you open the driver’s door. When the lights are on, the instrument panel will be on. 2 Indicators P. 74 indicator in the Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge. If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer. uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches ■ Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) 1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) Automatic lighting control can be used when the power mode is in ON. We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities. When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness. The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly. u You can change the auto light sensitivity setting. Models with automatic intermittent wipers Light Sensor Controls Models with Display Audio 2 Customized Features P. 318 The headlights comes on when you unlock a door in dark areas with the headlight switch in AUTO. u Once you lock the door, the headlights will go off. Models without automatic intermittent wipers Light Sensor Continued 147 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches 1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows: Setting Max High Mid Low Min Controls ■ Headlight Integration with Wiper The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped. ■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the driver’s door. If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position). The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime. 148 The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at Bright Dark 1Headlight Integration with Wiper This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on. When the ambient light is dark, the automatic lighting control feature overrides, and the headlights come on with or without the wipers sweeping more than several times. 1Automatic Lighting Off Feature Models with Display Audio You can change the headlight auto off timer setting. 2 Customized Features P. 318 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights * Fog Lights * When the headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights. 1Fog Lights * When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the instrument panel will be on. They go off when the headlights turn off, or when the daytime running lights are on. 2 Indicators P. 74 Fog Light Switch Controls * Not available on all models 149 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights Daytime Running Lights The daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met: • The power mode is in ON. • The headlight switch is off. • The parking brake is released. The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside. Controls 150 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) * Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) * Uses the camera attached, monitors the space ahead of your vehicle, and automatically changes the low beam headlights to high beam headlights when necessary. The system operates when: ■ The headlight switch is in AUTO. ■ The lever is in the low beam position. ■ The system recognizes that you The system changes between high and low beam headlights when: The camera is not detecting any lights coming from preceding or oncoming vehicles: The headlights change to high beams. The camera detects lights coming from a preceding or oncoming vehicle: The headlights are returned to low beams. The camera monitors the range within the 30-degrees view angle. The distance that the camera can detect lights ahead differs depending on conditions, such as the brightness of the lights and the weather. The auto high-beam determines when to change the headlight beams by responding to the brightness of the lights ahead of your vehicle. In the following cases, the system may not respond to the lights properly: • The brightness of the lights from the preceding or oncoming vehicle is intense or poor. • Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow, fog, windshield frost, etc.). • Other light sources, such as streetlights and electric billboards are illuminating the road ahead. • The brightness level of the road ahead constantly changes. • The road is bumpy or with many curves. • A vehicle cuts in front of you, or a vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or oncoming direction. • Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear. Controls are driving at night and the low beam headlights come on. ■ The vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h). 1Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) * If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually. 15-degrees * Not available on all models Continued 151 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) * ■ To Operate the System 1Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) * Turn the headlight switch in AUTO and pull the headlight lever to low beam. 2 Light Switches P. 146 The auto high-beam indicator comes on. Controls Headlight Switch ■ Temporary cancellation The auto high-beam system operation is temporarily canceled while: • You are continuously driving at a speed below 15 mph (24 km/h). • The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h). • The windshield wipers run at high speed for more than a few seconds. The system operation resumes once the condition that caused it to cancel improves. 152 * Not available on all models For the auto high-beam to work properly: • Do not place an object that reflects light on the dashboard. • Keep the windshield around the camera clean. When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens. • Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area around the camera. • Do not touch the camera lens. If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer. To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on the camera. uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) * ■ To manually cancel the system temporarily You can cancel the operation when you manually change the headlights to high beams. Push the lever forward until you hear a click, or lightly pull the lever towards you to flash high beams. The auto high-beam indicator goes off. If you want the auto high-beam operation to resume at once, pull the lever towards you. ■ To Disable the System If the Can Not Operate: message appears: • Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 1To Disable the System The auto high-beam is in the previously selected disabled or enabled setting each time you start the engine. Controls Disable the system when the vehicle is parked with the power mode is in ON and the light switch is in the AUTO position. To disable the system: Pull the light switch lever towards you and hold it for 40 seconds. The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will blink twice. To enable the system: Pull the light switch lever towards you and hold it for 30 seconds. The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will blink once. * Not available on all models 1Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) * 153 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers Wipers and Washers ■ Windshield Wipers/Washers Pull to use washer. 1Wipers and Washers The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the power mode is in ON. ■ MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever. ■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT*1/AUTO*2, LO, HI) Controls Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings. Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring ■ Adjusting wiper operation * Turn the adjustment ring to adjust wiper operation. MIST Lower speed, fewer sweeps OFF NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged. Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged. The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal. If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same. INT*1/AUTO*2 Higher speed, more sweeps LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe ■ Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop. *1 : Models with manual intermittent operation *2 : Models with automatic intermittent operation 154 * Not available on all models NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield, becoming stuck. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defroster and heated windshield * to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on. If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then remove the obstacle. uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers ■ Automatic Intermittent Wipers * When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode. 1Automatic Intermittent Wipers * The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below. Rainfall Sensor Controls The wipers operate intermittently, at low speed, or at high speed and stops in accordance with the amount of rainfall the rainfall sensor detects. ■ Auto sensitivity adjustment When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you can adjust the sensitivity of the rain fall sensor (using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will operate in accordance with your preference. Sensor sensitivity NOTICE AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situation in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system: • Cleaning the windshield • Driving through a car wash • No rain present Low sensitivity High sensitivity * Not available on all models 155 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror * button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the power mode is in ON. The rear defogger and heated door mirrors * automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. 1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button NOTICE When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to damage the heating wires. It is critical to wipe the window from side to side along the defogger heating wires. Controls This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged or deiced. Also, do not use the system for a long time while the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine. Models with Heated Door Mirror Canadian models Heated Windshield Button Press the heated windshield button to deice the windshield when the power mode is in ON. 156 * Not available on all models When the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door mirror may activate automatically for 10 minutes when you set the power mode to ON. 1Heated Windshield Button This system activates automatically if the temperate is below 4°C, then deactivates after 15 minutes. After that, the heated windshield button must be pressed to activate the system again for another 15 minutes. uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control Brightness Control (+ Button (- Button When the power mode is in ON, you can use the (+ or (- button to adjust instrument panel brightness. To brighten: Press the (+ button. To dim: Press the (- button. Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on whether the exterior lights are on or off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are on. If you press the (+ button until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on. The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off. Controls You will hear a beep when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. Several seconds after you have adjusted the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen. 1Brightness Control ■ Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the multiinformation display while you are adjusting it. 157 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System * Driving Position Memory System * You can store two driver’s seat (except for power lumbar) and door mirror positions with the driving position memory system. When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter or smart entry system, the seat and door mirrors adjust automatically to one of the two preset positions. Controls 158 When you enter the vehicle, the multi-information display briefly shows you which remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle. • DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1. • DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2. The driver’s seat moves rearward depending DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2 on the set seating position once you • Stop the vehicle. • Put the transmission in (P . • Turn the engine off. • Then open the driver’s door. Once the power mode is in the ACCESSORY position, the driver’s seat moves to the DRIVER 1 or 2 preset position. * Not available on all models 1Driving Position Memory System * Using the audio/information screen, you can disable the automatic seat and door mirrors adjustment function. 2 Customized Features P. 318 The driver’s seat easy feature can be turned ON/OFF. 2 Customized Features P. 318 System Operation The system will not operate if: • The vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h). • Either memory position button is pressed while the seat is in motion. • The seat position is adjusted while in operation. • The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear. To turn the memory position link settings back on, repeat this procedure. The LED will blink once. uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System * ■ Storing a Position in Memory Memory Button 1 Memory Button 2 ■ Recalling the Stored Position Memory Button 1 Memory Button 2 1. Move the shift lever to (P . 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2 ). u You will hear a beep, and the indicator light will blink. After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when: • You do not press the memory button within five seconds. • You readjust the seat and door mirror position before the double-beep. • You set the power mode to any position except ON. Controls SET Button 1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the driver’s seat and door mirrors to the desired position. 2. Press the SET button. u You will hear the beeper, and the memory button indicator light will blink. 3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2 within five seconds of pressing the SET button. u Once the seat and the outside mirror positions have been memorized, the indicator light on the button you pressed stays on and you will hear two beeps. 1Storing a Position in Memory 1Recalling the Stored Position The seat and the door mirrors will stop moving if you: • Press the SET button or memory button (1 or (2 . • Adjust the seat position or door mirrors. • Shift into a position other than (P . The seat and the door mirrors will automatically move to the memorized positions. When it has finished moving, you will hear the beeper, and the indicator light stays on. 159 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel Controls 160 The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture. 1. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever down. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is under the steering column. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and To lock in or out. u Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators. Lever To adjust 3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up to lock the steering wheel in position. u After adjusting the position, make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out. 1Adjusting the Steering Wheel 3 CAUTION Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash. Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped. Adjusting the Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position. ■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions * Up Tab Flip the tab to switch the position. The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark. 1Adjusting the Mirrors Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Front Seats P. 163 Controls Daytime Position Down Night Position ■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror * Up When you are driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you, based on inputs from the mirror sensor. This feature is always active. 1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror * The auto dimming function cancels when the shift lever is in (R . Down Sensor * Not available on all models 161 uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors Power Door Mirrors Folding Button (Canadian models) Selector Switch You can adjust the door mirrors when the power mode is in ON. ■ Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror. Adjustment Switch Controls Canadian models ■ Folding door mirrors Press the folding button to fold in and out the door mirrors. ■ Reverse Tilt Door Mirror * Selector Switch If activated, either side door mirror automatically tilts downward when you put the shift lever into (R : This improves close-in visibility on the selected side of the vehicle when backing up. The mirror automatically returns to its original position when you shift out of (R . To activate this feature, set the power mode to ON, and slide the selector switch to the left or right side. 162 * Not available on all models Adjusting the Seats Front Seats Allow sufficient space. Move back. ■ Adjusting the Seat Positions 3 WARNING Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate. Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. ■ Adjusting the front power seats * Always make seat adjustments before driving. Horizontal Position Adjustment Height Adjustment (Driver’s seat only) 1Adjusting the Seats Controls Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible. Lumbar Support Adjustment (Driver’s seat only) Seat-back Angle Adjustment * Not available on all models Continued 163 uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats ■ Adjusting the front manual seats * 1Adjusting the front manual seats * Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position. Height Adjustment (Driver’s seat only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat. Controls Seat-back Angle Adjustment Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar. 164 * Not available on all models Pull up the lever to change the angle. uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats ■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs 1Adjusting the Seat-Backs Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel. Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury. Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash. Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat. Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back. Controls The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position. 3 WARNING Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation. If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help. 165 uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats Rear Seats ■ Folding Up the Rear Seat Controls The right and left cushions can be raised independently to make room for cargo. ■ Folding up the rear seat 1. Raise the armrest if it is lowered. Handle 2. Pull the handle and lift up the seat cushion. 3. Release the handle and push the seat cushion firmly against the back support to lock it into place. u The seat leg automatically retracts as the cushion is raised. ■ Unfolding the rear seat Handle 166 1Folding Up the Rear Seat 1. Hold the seat in its upright position and pull the handle. u The seat cushion will abruptly drop under its own weight if you do not support it. 2. Slowly lower the cushion until the leg is resting in the floor guide and the cushion is locked into place. u The seat leg automatically extends out as the cushion is lowered. The seat cushion is locked with a mechanism inside the seat. When the seat is locked, it can not be completely lifted up from the floor without pulling the handle. However, the seat cushion may move up from the floor slightly which is normal. If the seat is in this position, push the seat cushion down before pulling the handle to raise the seat. Check to make sure there is nothing in the way of the seat cushion or leg before lowering the seat. The right and left cushions can be raised together or separately to accommodate passengers and cargo. uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position Maintain a Proper Sitting Position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. 3 WARNING Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor. Controls In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag. 1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position 167 uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints Head Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions. ■ Adjusting the front head restraint positions Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions. Controls 168 Position head in the center of the head restraint. Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant’s head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant’s ears should be level with the center height of the restraint. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button. 1Head Restraints 3 WARNING Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash. Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving. In order for the head restraint system to work properly: • Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs. • Do not place any objects between an occupant and the seat-back. • Install each restraint in its proper location. uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints ■ Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Position ■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair. To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out. To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position. Controls A passenger sitting in the rear seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button. 1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints 3 WARNING Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash. Always replace the head restraints before driving. 169 uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest Armrest ■ Using the Front Seat Armrest Pull down the armrest. Models with adjustable armrest Lower the armrest all the way, then pull up to a desired position. Controls ■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest Pull the armrest down from the center seat back. 170 Interior Lights/Convenience Items Interior Lights ■ Interior Light Switches Models without Moonroof Door Activated Position Off Models with Moonroof ■ ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. ■ Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: • When any doors are opened. • You unlock the driver’s door. • When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). ■ OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. Door Activated Position Off In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following situations: • When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it. • When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) but do not open a door. Models with Display Audio You can change the interior lights dimming time. 2 Customized Features P. 318 Controls On 1Interior Light Switches The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations: • When you lock the driver’s door. • When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY mode. • When you set the power mode to ON. On If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes. Continued 171 uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights ■ Map Lights Models without Moonroof 1Map Lights ■ Front The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the buttons * or lenses *. Controls Models with Moonroof ■ Rear The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses when the front interior light switch is in the door activated position. 172 * Not available on all models Models without Moonroof When the interior light switch is in the door activated position and a door is open, pressing the lens does not turn off the map light. uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items Interior Convenience Items ■ Glove Box 1Glove Box Pull the lever to open the glove box. You can lock the glove box with the built-in key. To Lock 3 WARNING An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt. Always keep the glove box closed while driving. Controls Glove Box Continued 173 uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Console Compartment To open the console compartment, press the button to unlock the lid, and then slide it rearward. Controls Button ■ Console Tray Slide the tray when you use the console compartment. Tray 174 uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Beverage Holders 1Beverage Holders NOTICE ■ Front seat beverage holders Are located in the console between the front seats. Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior. Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you. Controls Front ■ Door side beverage holders Are located on the lower section of each inner door panel. Rear Continued 175 uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Rear seat beverage holders Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat beverage holders. Controls 176 uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Accessory Power Sockets 1Accessory Power Sockets The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or ON. ■ Accessory power socket (console panel) Open the cover to use it. NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element: The power socket can overheat. The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less. ■ Accessory power socket (console When both sockets are being used, the combined power rating of the accessories should not exceed 180 watts (15 amps). Controls To prevent battery drain, use the power socket only when the engine is running. compartment) Pull the handle and open the cover to use it. Continued 177 uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Coat Hooks 1Coat Hooks There is a coat hook on the rear grab handle of both sides. Pull it down to use it. Controls 178 The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy items. uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Sunglasses Holder 1Sunglasses Holder To open the sunglasses holder, push and release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches. Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items. You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder. Push Controls ■ Conversation mirror * The sunglasses holder comes with a mirror. Open the sunglasses holder fully, then push it back to the first detent. You can use the mirror to view the rear seats. * Not available on all models Continued 179 uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Heated Steering Wheel * Heated Steering Wheel Button 1Heated Steering Wheel * The power mode must be in ON to use the heated steering wheel. Press the button on the left side of the steering wheel. Controls 180 Indicator When a comfortable temperature is reached, press the button again to turn it off. The heated steering wheel is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle. * Not available on all models Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start. uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Front Seat Heaters * 1Front Seat Heaters * The power mode is in ON to use the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats faster than the LO setting. 3 WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters. The appropriate indicator will be on while the seat heater is on. For low heat and high heat, press LO and HI respectively. Center the rocker switch to turn the heater off. Controls Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters. Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start. In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and does not automatically turn off. * Not available on all models Continued 181 uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation * Controls * Not available on all models 3 WARNING If the power mode is in ON: Seat heater - The HI setting heats the seats faster than the LO setting. Seat ventilation - The HI setting ventilates the seats faster than the LO setting. Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters. Press the seat heater or the seat ventilation button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on) Do not use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start. When a comfortable temperature is reached while using the seat heaters in HI, select MID or LO to keep the seat warm. 182 1Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation * Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters. uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Rear Outer Seat Heaters * 1Rear Outer Seat Heaters * If the power mode is in ON: The HI setting heats the seats faster than the LO setting. There is no heater in the rear center seating position. Once a comfortable temperature has been reached using HI setting, select MID or LO to keep the seat warm. * Not available on all models Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters. Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters. Controls Press the seat heater button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on) 3 WARNING Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start. 183 uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuIn-Bed Convenience Items In-Bed Convenience Items ■ In-Bed Box Turn the knobs to the left to open the lid. Knobs Controls ■ AC Power Outlet * 1AC Power Outlet * To use the AC power outlet, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. 1. Turn the knobs to the left to open the lid. 2 In-Bed Box P. 184 2. Open the cover and plug in the appliance slightly. Turn the plug 90° clockwise, then push it in all the way. Do not use the AC power outlet for electrical appliances that require high initial peak wattage, such as cathode-ray tube type televisions, refrigerators, electric pumps, etc. It is not suitable for devices that process precise data, such as medical equipment, and that require an extremely stable power supply, such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc. The AC power outlet is designed to supply power for up to 115 volt appliances that are rated 400 watts or less. Continued use of any electrical appliance/device exceeding these ratings may result in damage to the appliance/device. 184 * Not available on all models uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuIn-Bed Convenience Items ■ ON and OFF Indicator Continued The protection circuit may be activated to cut the power supply if any of the following conditions apply: • The engine is started when the power outlet switch on. • An electrical appliance exceeding the maximum capacity is used. • The total power consumed by the electrical features (head lights, air conditioning, etc.), including the truck bed audio *, has exceeded the maximum vehicle wattage capacity for a prolonged period of time. Controls * Not available on all models 1AC Power Outlet * Press the AC power outlet button to turn the system on and off. u The indicator in the button comes on when the system is on. 400W (Amber) mode is: • When the engine running and the shift lever in (P . 150W (Green) mode is: • When the power mode is in ACCESSORY or ON. • When the engine running and the shift lever out of (P . • When the truck bed audio system is activated. 185 uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuIn-Bed Convenience Items ■ Bed Lights 1Bed Lights The bed lights can be turned on or off by pressing the button when the shift lever is in (P . u The indicator in the meter comes on when the lights are on. Controls ■ Tie-down Anchors Anchors 186 The tie-down anchors on the pickup bed can be used to install a net for securing items. The bed lights comes on when you swing open the tailgate or open the trunk. If you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) and leave the bed lights on, they will shut off after 30 minutes. uuInterior Lights/Convenience ItemsuIn-Bed Convenience Items ■ Cargo Hooks Hooks There are three hooks for plastic grocery bags at the back of the trunk. They are designed to hold light items. Heavy objects may damage the hooks. Controls 187 Climate Control System * Using Automatic Climate Control The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference. Dashboard and back of the center console vents Dashboard and floor, and back of the center console vents Controls AUTO Button Driver’s Side Temperature Control Switch Floor vents Floor and defroster vents A/C (Air Conditioning) Button Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Switch (On/Off) Button SYNC (Synchronized) Button MODE Button Fan Control Button (Windshield Defroster) Button (Recirculation) Button Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side temperature control switch. 3. Press the ON/OFF button to cancel. 1Using Automatic Climate Control If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically. If ECON mode is selected, the fan may turn off. To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may operate at low speed for a while after the AUTO button has been pressed. Once you have set the desired temperature, do not use the temperature control switches more than necessary. Doing so may delay the time it takes to reach the set temperature. If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down. When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed. Pressing the ON/OFF button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection. 188 * Not available on all models uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control ■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Press the button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system. Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations. ■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows 1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows Press the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings. For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving. Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up. Controls Pressing the button turns the air conditioner system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode. If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows. Continued 189 uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control ■ To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Press the 2. Press the Controls 190 1To rapidly defrost the windows button. button. After defrosting or defogging the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility. uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control ■ Synchronized Mode 1Synchronized Mode When you press the button, the system changes to synchronized mode. When the system is in synchronized mode off, the temperature for the driver, front passenger, and rear seats can be set separately. Controls You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side, front passenger side and rear seats in synchronized mode. 1. Press the SYNC button. u The system will switch to synchronized mode. 2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control switch. Press the SYNC button to return to synchronized mode off. 191 uuClimate Control System * uRear Climate Control System Rear Climate Control System ■ Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Front Panel 1Rear Climate Control System Models with REAR LOCK button LOCK appears on the rear control panel while the rear lock is on. If the rear lock is on while in SYNC mode, the rear control panel is disabled. LOCK SYNC appears on the rear control panel. Controls 1Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Front Panel Models with REAR LOCK button (Rear On/Off) Button RR SETTINGS Button REAR LOCK Button Use the system when the engine is running and the climate control system is operating. 1. Press the REAR (Rear On/Off) button. 2. Press the RR SETTINGS button. u The system adjusts the rear climate control system. 3. To turn off the rear climate control system, press the REAR (Rear On/Off) button. 192 Press the REAR LOCK button to turn the rear lock mode on and off. While the rear lock mode is on, the rear control panel is disabled. uREAR LOCK appears on the display. uuClimate Control System * uRear Climate Control System ■ Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel * Rear floor vents Rear AUTO Button When the REAR LOCK button on the front control panel is off, the temperature of the rear passenger compartment can be controlled independently. Rear console vents / (Rear Fan Control) Buttons Controls Rear Temperature Control Buttons Rear console vents and floor vents 1Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel * (Rear On/Off) Button Use the system when the engine is running and the climate control system is operating. 1. Press the (Rear On/Off) button. 2. Press the Rear AUTO button. 3. Adjust the interior temperature using the rear temperature control button. 4. To turn off the rear climate control system, press the button. * Not available on all models 193 uuClimate Control System * uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors Automatic Climate Control Sensors The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them. Sensor Controls Sensor 194 Heating and Cooling System * Using Vents, Heating and A/C Dashboard vents Dashboard and floor vents Floor vents Floor and defroster vents Adjusts the interior temperature. Adjusts the fan speed. Windshield Defroster Button (On/Off) Button Turns on the A/C, selects airflow from the defroster vents at the base of the windshield, and switches the mode to fresh air. (Recirculation) Button Press the button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system. Controls Temperature Control Switch Fan Control Switch Button Turns on the A/C, selects airflow from the dashboard vents, and switches the mode to recirculation. MODE Button Change airflow. Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations. * Not available on all models A/C Button Press to cool the interior or dehumidify while heating. Continued 195 uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C ■ Heating 1Heating The heater uses heat from the engine coolant to warm the air. 1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control switch. 2. Press the mode button to select . 3. Adjust the temperature using the temperature control switch. Controls ■ To rapidly warm up the interior 1. Set the fan to the maximum speed. 2. Select . 3. Set the temperature to maximum heat. 4. Press the button (indicator on). ■ To dehumidify the interior When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up. 1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control switch. 2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning. 3. Select . 4. Adjust the temperature using the temperature control switch. 196 When you select , the mode automatically switches to fresh air. 1To rapidly warm up the interior Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in recirculation mode. uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C ■ Cooling 1To rapidly cool down the interior 1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control switch. 2. Press the mode button to select . 3. Adjust the temperature using the temperature control switch. 4. Press the A/C button (indicator on). 1. Set the fan to the maximum speed. 2. Set the temperature to maximum cool. 3. Press the button (indicator on). Continued Controls ■ To rapidly cool down the interior If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows. 197 uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C ■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows Pressing the button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode. ■ To rapidly defrost the windows Controls 198 1. Set the fan to the maximum speed. 2. Press the button. 3. Press the button. 4. Set the temperature to maximum heat. 1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving. Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up. If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows. 1To rapidly defrost the windows After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility. Features This chapter describes how to operate technology features. Audio System About Your Audio System................ 200 USB Port(s) ....................................... 201 Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 203 Audio System Theft Protection ......... 204 Audio Remote Controls.................... 205 Models with color audio system Audio System Basic Operation ........ 207 Audio/Information Screen ................ 208 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 212 Display Setup ................................... 213 Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 214 Playing an iPod ................................ 216 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 219 Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 222 * Not available on all models Models with Display Audio Audio System Basic Operation ........ 225 Audio/Information Screen ................ 226 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 243 Display Setup ................................... 244 Voice Control Operation .................. 246 Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 250 Playing SiriusXM® Radio * ................. 254 Canadian models Playing a CD .................................... 262 Playing an iPod ................................ 265 Models with navigation system Song By VoiceTM (SBV)...................... 268 U.S. models Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 274 Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 277 HondaLink® ..................................... 279 Wi-Fi Connection............................. 284 Siri® Eyes Free .................................. 286 Apple CarPlayTM ............................... 287 Android AutoTM ............................... 290 Truck Bed Audio System * ................ 294 Audio Error Messages ...................... 295 General Information on the Audio System ............................................. 299 Customized Features........................ 318 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * ... 349 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 352, 377 Playing Pandora® ............................. 272 199 Audio System About Your Audio System The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio * service. It can also play audio CDs *, WMA/MP3/AAC files *, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices. You can operate the audio system from the buttons* and knobs* on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface *. Models with Display Audio iPod Features Remote Controls State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle. Models with Display Audio SiriusXM® * is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio *, Inc. iPod USB Flash Drive * Not available on all models iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc. SiriusXM® Radio * is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico. Models with color audio system 200 Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not supported. SiriusXM® Radio * is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio *, contact a dealer. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 299 USB Flash Drive Remote Controls 1About Your Audio System uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s) USB Port(s) Install the iPod USB connector or the USB flash drive to the USB port. ■ On the front console compartment On the front console compartment 1USB Port(s) • Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the Models with Display Audio The USB port (1.5A) is for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto. • • Models with color audio system Models with color audio system Models with Display Audio The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on a USB flash drive, connecting a mobile phone, and charging devices. • • • If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod. ■ In the console compartment Features In the console compartment vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it. We recommend using an extension cable with the USB port. Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub. Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged. We recommend keeping your data backed up before using the device in your vehicle. Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version. Models with Display Audio The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on a USB flash drive, connecting a mobile phone, and charging devices. Models with color audio system Models with color audio system Models with Display Audio The USB port (2.5A) is only for charging devices. USB charge The USB port can supply up to 1.0A/1.5A/2.5A of power. It does not output 1.0A/1.5A/2.5A unless the device requests. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged. Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON first. This port is for battery charge only. You cannot play music even if you have connected a music player to it. Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise in the radio you are listening to. Continued 201 uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s) On the back of the console compartment Features 202 * Not available on all models ■ On the back of the console compartment * The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices. uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack Auxiliary Input Jack Use the jack to connect standard audio devices. 1. Open the AUX cover. 2. Connect a standard audio device to the input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug. u The audio system automatically switches to the AUX mode. 1Auxiliary Input Jack Models with color audio system You can return to AUX mode by pressing the MEDIA button. Models with Display Audio You can return to AUX mode by selecting SOURCE on the audio screen. You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace the audio system. Features 203 uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection Audio System Theft Protection The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system. ■ Reactivating the audio system 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked. Features 204 1Audio System Theft Protection U.S. models Find the audio system’s security code and serial number label in your owner’s manual kit. We recommend that you write down the serial number in this owner’s manual. Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and then obtain the code. You can find out about your serial number and security code from a dealer. uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Audio Remote Controls Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. SOURCE Button SOURCE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows: Models with color audio system Button Button (+ Button (- Button (Menu) Button * FM1FM2AMUSB/iPodBluetooth® AudioAUX Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used. Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be operated. Models with Display Audio FMAMSiriusXM® *CD *USBiPod Pandora® *Bluetooth® AudioAUX Buttons • When listening to the radio Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station. • When listening to a CD *, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song. • When listening to a CD (MP3/WMA/AAC) *, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press and hold : To skip to the next folder. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder. Continued Features (+ (- (Volume) Buttons Press (+ : To increase the volume. Press (- : To decrease the volume. * Not available on all models 1Audio Remote Controls 205 uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Models with Display Audio Features 206 Steering Wheel (Menu) Button • When listening to the radio Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Save Preset, or Seek. • When listening to the HD RadioTM* Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Save Preset, or Seek. • When listening to the SiriusXM® * Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Save Preset, Channel, or Category. • When listening to a CD * or USB flash drive Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Repeat, or Random. • When listening to an iPod Press : To display the menu items. You can select Repeat or Shuffle. • When listening to a Bluetooth® Audio Press : To display the menu items. You can select Pause or Play. • When listening to a Pandora® * Press : To display the menu items. You can select Bookmark, or Play/ Pause. * Not available on all models 1Audio Remote Controls Models with Display Audio The button is available only when the audio mode is FM, AM, SiriusXM® *, CD *, USB, iPod, Pandora® *, or Bluetooth® Audio. Audio System Basic Operation Models with color audio system 1Audio System Basic Operation To use the audio system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK (Day/Night) (Sound) button to access some audio functions. Button Button These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate Press Menu Items 2 Wallpaper Setup P. 210 2 Display Setup P. 213 2 Scan P. 215, 221 2 Play Mode P. 218, 221 2 RDS Settings P. 215 Selector Knob MENU/ CLOCK Button (Back) Button Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection. MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any mode. The available modes include the wallpaper, display, clock, language setup, and play modes. Play mode choices include scan, random, repeat, and so on. (Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display. (Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode. (Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen brightness. Press , then adjust the brightness using . u Each time you press , the mode switches between the daytime mode, nighttime mode and OFF mode. One of the operating systems used in this unit is eCos. For software license terms and condition, visit their website (eCos license URL: http://ecos.sourceware.org/license-overview.html) For source code disclosure and other details regarding eCos, visit: http://www.hondaopensource2.com Features Menu Display to select. to enter. Press the SOURCE, , , or button on the steering wheel to change any audio setting. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 205 207 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options. ■ Switching the Display Audio/Information Screen Audio Features Clock/Wallpaper 208 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Audio Shows the current audio information. ■ Clock/Wallpaper Shows a clock screen or an image you import. ■ Change display 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . u If you want to return to the audio/information screen, select Audio. Features Continued 209 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Wallpaper Setup 1Wallpaper Setup You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen. ■ Import wallpaper You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive. 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port. • When importing wallpaper files, the image must be • • • • 2 USB Port(s) P. 201 Features 210 2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 3. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 5. Rotate to select Import, then press . u The picture name is displayed on the list. 6. Rotate to select a desired picture, then press . u The selected picture is displayed. 7. Press to save the picture. 8. Press to select OK. 9. Rotate to select a location to save the picture, then press . u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen. • • in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported. The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 2 MB. The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black. Up to 255 files can be selected. If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No compatible images were found. See Owner’s Manual. message appears. uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Select wallpaper 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 4. Rotate to select Select, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press 1Wallpaper Setup To go back to the previous screen, press the (Back) button. When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed. . ■ To view wallpaper once it is set Features 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to set, then press . ■ Delete wallpaper 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 4. Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press 6. Rotate to select Yes, then press . u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen. . 211 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Adjusting the Sound (sound) Button Press the (sound) button, and rotate to scroll through the following choices: Selector Knob TRE is selectable. Features BAS Bass TRE Treble FAD Fader BAL Balance SUBW SVC Sub woofer Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then press . 212 1Adjusting the Sound The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases. uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen. ■ Changing the Screen Brightness ■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner. Features 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Adjustment, then press . 4. Rotate to select Brightness, then press . 5. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press . 1Changing the Screen Brightness 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Color Theme, then press . 4. Rotate to select the setting you want, then press . 213 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Playing AM/FM Radio Audio/Information Screen RADIO Button Press to select a band. Features VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. / (Seek/Skip) Buttons Press or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal. Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button. 214 Selector Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection. MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio ■ Radio Data System (RDS) 1Playing AM/FM Radio Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station. ■ To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select the station, then press You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into reset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store 6 stations each. . ■ Update List Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Update List, then press The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available. Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 205 . 1Radio Data System (RDS) Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press . 4. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press . When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency. Features ■ Radio text ■ Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Scan, then press . To turn off scan, press . 215 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button. 2 USB Port(s) P. 201 Audio/Information Screen USB Indicator Appears when an iPod is connected. Features MEDIA Button Press to select iPod (if connected). VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Selector Knob Turn to change songs. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. / (Seek/Skip) Buttons Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song. Album Art MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. Play Mode Buttons Press to select a play mode. 216 (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the Selector Knob 1. Press to display the iPod music list. 1Playing an iPod Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system. If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 296 Item Selection 2. Rotate to select a category. Features Category Selection 3. Press to display a list of items in the category. 4. Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen to is displayed. Continued 217 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select. Play Mode Buttons Features 218 ■ To turn off a play mode Press the selected button. 1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle: Plays all available songs in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Repeat One Track: Repeats the current song. You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press . uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button. 2 USB Port(s) P. 201 USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected. / (Seek/Skip) Buttons Press or to change tracks. Press and hold to move rapidly within a track. Play Mode Buttons (1-6) Press to select a play mode. Selector Knob Turn to change folders. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. Features MEDIA Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected). VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Audio/Information Screen MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display. *1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. Continued 219 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob 1. Press to display a folder list. 1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 299 Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) are not played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file. Folder Selection 2. Rotate to select a folder. Features Track Selection 220 3. Press to display a list of tracks in that folder. 4. Rotate to select a track, then press . If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 296 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select. Play Mode Buttons Press the selected button. Play Mode Menu Items Repeat Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file. Random Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All: Plays all files in random order. Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder. Features ■ To turn off a play mode 1How to Select a Play Mode You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press . 221 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio Playing Bluetooth® Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. 2 Phone Setup P. 358 Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. Audio/Information Screen Features Selector Knob Turn to change groups. Press to display a music search list. Turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. MEDIA Button Press to select the Bluetooth Audio mode (if connected). VOL/ (Volume/ Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. 222 Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones: • U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. • Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876. In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving. Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected. If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play. In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly. Some functions may not be available on some devices. Pause Button (Preset 2) Press to pause playing a file. Play Button (Preset 1) Press to resume playing a file. / Press 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio (Seek/Skip) Buttons or to change files. MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio ■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files MEDIA Button Pause Button Play Button 1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files 1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL. 2. Press the MEDIA button until the Bluetooth® Audio mode is selected. If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected. To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions. The pause function may not be available on some phones. If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack or USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system. ■ To pause or resume a file Press a Play or Pause button to select a mode. Continued Features Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone. 223 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio ■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob 1. Press Features Category Selection Item Selection 224 2. Rotate to display the music search list. to select a category. 3. Press to display a list of items in the category. 4. Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen to is displayed. 1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the categories may not be displayed. Audio System Basic Operation Models with Display Audio 1Audio System Basic Operation To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. : Select to go to the home screen. (Menu) Icon (Home) Icon 2 Switching the Display P. 226 : Select to display any mode. The available modes include Sound, View Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes. : Select to go back to the previous display when it is displayed. Audio Menu Items 2 Station List P. 251, 252 2 Music Search List P. 263, 266, 275 2 Scan P. 252, 261, 264, 276 2 Play Mode P. 264, 267, 276 (Day/Night) Icon : Select to change the audio/information screen brightness. Select once and select (- or (+ to make an adjustment. u Each time you select , the mode switches among the daytime mode, nighttime mode and off mode. Features (Back) Icon 225 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options. ■ Switching the Display ■ Using the Press the Features 226 button (display) button to change the display. (Display) Button Audio/Information Screen uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Using the audio/information screen 1Using the audio/information screen Touchscreen Operation • Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping, and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions. • Some items may be grayed out during driving to reduce the potential for distraction. • You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or use voice commands. • Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen response. • You can use the microfiber cleaning cloth included in your owner’s kit to remove dust or fingerprints from the touchscreen. Home Screen Models without navigation system Models with navigation system (Home) Icon Features You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 318 Select to go to the home screen. Select Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Smartphone Connection, or Truck Bed Audio *. ■ Phone Displays the HFL information. 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 377 * Not available on all models Continued 227 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Info Displays Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper. To see all available information, Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper, or System/Device Information, select on the Info Menu screen. Features Trip Computer: • Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information. • History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The information is stored every time you reset Trip A. To delete the history manually, select Delete History on the History of Trip A tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes. Voice Info: Displays the all commands list. Clock/Wallpaper: Displays the clock and wallpaper. System/Device Information: • System Info: Displays the software version of the audio system. • USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device. ■ Audio Displays the current audio information. ■ Settings Enters the customizing menu screen. 2 Customized Features P. 324 ■ Navigation * Displays the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual 228 * Not available on all models uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ HondaLink Connects with your smartphone*1 to play personalized music, information, and social media streams. 2 HondaLink® P. 279 ■ Smartphone Connection Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto. 2 Apple CarPlayTM P. 287 2 Android AutoTM P. 290 ■ Truck Bed Audio * Displays the Truck Bed Audio System screen. Features 2 Truck Bed Audio System * P. 294 *1: Available on specific phones only. Check automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/ for U.S. and www.handsfreelink.ca for Canada for compatible phones and hondalink.com for U.S. and honda.ca/hondalink for Canada for feature details. * Not available on all models Continued 229 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout 1. Select . 2. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization screen. 3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be. 4. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home screen. Features 230 1Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout It is not possible to change the position of the icon. uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Wallpaper Setup 1Wallpaper Setup You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen. ■ Import wallpaper You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive. 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port. 2 USB Port(s) P. 201 Continued Features 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock/Info. 4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. 5. Select Add New. u The picture name is displayed on the list. 6. Select a desired picture. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. 7. Select Start Import to save the data. u The display will return to the wallpaper list. The wallpaper you set up on Clock/Wallpaper Type cannot be displayed on the multi-information display. • When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported. • The file name must be fewer than 255 characters. • The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). • The individual file size limit is 5 MB. • The maximum image size is 4,096 × 4,096 pixels. If the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black. • If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No files detected message appears. 231 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Select wallpaper 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info. 3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 4. Select a desired wallpaper. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 5. Select Set. u The display will return to the wallpaper list. 1Wallpaper Setup From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a preview at full-size screen. ■ To view wallpaper once it is set Features 1. Select . 2. Select Info. 3. Select . 4. Select Clock/Wallpaper. ■ Delete wallpaper 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info. 3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 5. Select Delete. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. 6. Select Yes to delete completely. u The display will return to the wallpaper list. 232 To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or select . When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed. To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All, then Yes. uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Home Screen 1Home Screen The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add any more pages. ■ To change to a next screen Swipe Icon or Current page position , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen. Continued Features Selecting Icon 233 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To use apps or widgets 1To use apps or widgets 1. Select . 2. Select . u The APPS screen appears. 3. Select the app or widget you want to use. Features Preinstall app list: • Browser: Displays the web browser utilized by smartphone and Wi-Fi connection. • Calculator: Displays Calculator. • Downloads: Displays the data downloaded from the web browser and so on. • Install USB: Check with a Honda dealer for apps that are available for installation. • Search: Displays various retrieval screens. • Settings: Displays the Android setting screen. (APPS) Icon Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that app’s or widget’s shortcut on the home screen. Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 348 If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 348 In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer. There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen will return to before the browser startup. Do not install apps other than those confirmed by a Honda dealer. Installation of unauthorized apps may introduce data corruption risks to your vehicle’s information and your privacy. You can delete user installed apps by the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Detail Information. 6. Select an App that you want to delete. 7. Select Delete. Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted. 234 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To add app or widget icons on the home screen App or widget icons can be added on the home screen. 1. Select . 2. Select . 3. Select and hold empty space on the home screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 4. Select Add App or Add Widget. u The corresponding screen will be displayed. Features Select and hold. Continued 235 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Select and hold. Features 236 Drag and drop. 5. Select and hold an app or widget icon you want to add. u The screen switches to the customization screen. 6. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be. 7. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home screen. uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To move icons on the home screen 1To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen. 1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be. 3. Select OK. Select and hold. u The screen will return to the home screen. You can also move the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Smartphone Connection, and Truck Bed Audio * icons in the same manner. Features Drag and drop. * Not available on all models Continued 237 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen. 1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove to the trash icon. u The icon is removed from the home Select and hold. screen. 3. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home screen. Features Drag and drop to trash icon. 238 * Not available on all models 1To remove icons on the home screen You cannot delete the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Smartphone Connection, and Truck Bed Audio * icons. Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen. uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Status Area Swipe 1. Swipe the upper area of the screen. u The status area appears. 2. Select an item to see the details. 3. Select or swipe up the icon to close the area. Features Status Area Icon Continued 239 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Closing Apps You can close specific apps running in the background on the system. 1. Select and hold . 2. Select an app you want to close. 3. Select Stop. u The display will return to the app list. 1Closing Apps If you leave the apps used open in the background, some apps may stop operating properly next time using them. If this happens close unused apps. To close all apps on the system, select Stop All, then Yes. You cannot close the apps of HondaLink® and Garmin *. Features 240 * Not available on all models uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Updating Apps 1Updating Apps Some of the audio system’s apps can be updated wirelessly when connected via WiFi, or Bluetooth® in conjunction with the HondaLink® app installed on a compatible iOS or Android device. If an update is available, the audio system beeps and a notification is displayed at the top of the screen with the respective app’s update icon. The wireless updates are for the apps on the audio system only. To update compatible apps on your iPhone or Android phone, please visit the App Store or Google Play Store, respectively. ■ To update an app: 1. From the top of the screen, swipe down to see the messages. Features 2. Select the software update notification from the list. Continued 241 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen 3. Select Download. 4. Select OK. Features 242 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Adjusting the Sound 1. Select . 2. Select Audio. 3. Select . 4. Select Sound. The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases. You can also adjust the sound the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select Sound. When the Truck Bed Audio system is played select a tab from the following choices: • BASS-TRE: Bass, Treble • SUBW: Subwoofer • SVC: Speed Volume Compensation Features Select a tab from the following choices: • BASS-TRE: Bass, Treble • FAD-BAL: Fader, Balance • CTR-SUBW: Center, Subwoofer • SVC: Speed Volume Compensation 1Adjusting the Sound 243 uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen. ■ Changing the Screen Brightness 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Display tab. 5. Select Display Settings. 6. Select the setting you want. 7. Select OK. Features ■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Display tab. 5. Select Background Color. 6. Select the setting you want. 7. Select OK. 244 1Changing the Screen Brightness You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner. uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup ■ Selecting an Audio Source Select the source icon Source Select Screen Source List Icons ■ Limitations for Manual Operation Features Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source. Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped. 245 uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Voice Control Operation Features 246 Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling. 1Voice Control Operation ■ Voice Recognition 1Voice Recognition To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: • Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are using. The system recognizes only certain commands. Available navigation commands. 2 Voice Portal Screen P. 247 • Close the windows. • Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone on the ceiling. • Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words. • Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your command if more than one person is speaking at the same time. When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command. The voice control system can only be used from the driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passenger’s side. uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation ■ Voice Portal Screen You can see the list of commands in Voice Info on the Info menu screen. Select Info, then select . ■ Audio*1 This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone call command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone. • Dial by number • Call history • Redial • Call <Your Contact Name> • Call <Phone Number> Phone Call commands are not available if using Apple CarPlay. When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio. • Audio On • Audio Off • Radio FM • Radio AM • Radio SXM * • DISC * • Pandora * • iPod • USB • Other Sources Pandora® * cannot be used with Android Auto. ■ Music Search*1 This can be only used when the iPod or USB device is connected. Features When the (Talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say “Voice Help” after the beep or select Voice Help. ■ Phone Call ■ Navigation*1 The screen changes the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized. ■ Voice Settings The screen changes the Voice Recog tab on the System settings screen. ■ Trip Computer*1 *1: Models with navigation system * Not available on all models The screen changes the trip computer screen. Continued 247 uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation ■ Voice Help Features You can see a list of the available commands on the screen. • Useful Commands * • Phone Commands • Audio Commands * • Climate Control Commands * • On Screen Commands • Music Search Commands * • General Commands * • Voice Settings • Getting Started • All Commands ■ Useful Commands The system accepts these commands on the voice portal top screen. • Call <Phone Number> • Call <Your Contact Name> • What time is it? • What is today’s date? ■ Phone Commands The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone. • Call by Number • Call by Name • Call <Phone Number> • Call <Your Contact Name> ■ Audio Commands*1 The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio. ■ Pandora Commands * • Pandora play ■ iPod Commands • • • • • iPod play iPod play track <1-30> Music Search What album is this? What am I listening to? ■ USB Commands • Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM • Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8> FM • Radio FM preset <1-12> ■ Radio AM Commands ■ Bluetooth® audio Commands ■ Radio SXM Commands * • SXM channel <1-999> • SXM channel <station name> • Radio SXM preset <1-12> * Not available on all models • DISC play • DISC play track <1-30> • • • • • ■ Radio FM Commands * • Radio tune to <530-1710> AM • Radio AM preset <1-6> 248 ■ DISC Commands * USB play USB play track <1-30> Music Search What album is this? What am I listening to? • Bluetooth® audio play NOTE: Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio devices. uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation ■ Play Commands • AUX audio play When On Screen Commands is selected, the explanation screen is displayed. • • • • • • ■ Music Search Commands*1 ■ List Commands The system accepts these commands on the Music Search screen. • • • • • ■ On Screen Commands ■ Using Song By Voice Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you to select music from your iPod or USB device using Voice Commands. To activate this mode, you must push the talk switch and say: “Music search”. ■ Song By Voice Commands • • • • • • What am I listening to? Who am I listening to? Who is this? What’s playing? Who’s playing? What album is this? Play artist <Name> Play track/song <Name> Play album <Name> Play genre/category <Name> Play playlist <Name> Play composer <Name> List artist <Name> List album <Name> List genre/category <Name> List playlist <Name> List composer <Name> ■ General Commands • What time is it? • What is today’s date? ■ Climate Control Commands*1 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Climate Control on Climate Control off Fan Speed <1-7> Temperature max heat Temperature max cool Temperature <57-87> degrees Defrost on Defrost off Air conditioner on Air conditioner off More Climate control automatic Vent Dash and floor Fan speed up Fan speed down Floor vents Floor and defrost Temperature up Temperature down Features ■ AUX-Audio commands *1: Models with navigation system 249 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Playing AM/FM Radio Multi-Information Display Features /AUDIO (Power/Audio) Icon Select to turn the audio system on and off. VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume. (Menu) Icon Select to display the menu items. (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. Scan Icon Select to scan each station with a strong signal. Tune Icons Select or frequency. to tune the radio *1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed. 250 Audio/Information Screen Open/Close Icon*1 Displays/hides the detailed information. Seek Icons Select or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal. Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display preset 7 onwards. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio ■ Preset Memory 1Preset Memory The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available. To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store. Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or select SOURCE on the screen. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 205 You can also store a preset station by the following procedure. 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store. You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into preset memory. Models with HD RadioTM HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select the station. Features ■ Station List ■ Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select Refresh. Continued 251 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio ■ Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Cancel or . ■ Radio Data System (RDS) 1Radio Data System (RDS) Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station. ■ To find an RDS station from Station List Features 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select the station. ■ Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select Refresh. ■ Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Select . 2. Select View Radio Text. ■ Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Cancel or 252 . When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Models with HD RadioTM ■ HD Subchannel Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station. 1. Select . 2. Select HD Radio Subchannel. 3. Select the channel number. Features 253 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * Playing SiriusXM® Radio * Multi-Information Display /AUDIO (Power/Audio) Icon Press to turn the audio system on and off. Audio/Information Screen Features Station Art VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume. (Menu) Icon Select to display the menu items. (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. Scan Icon Select to scan each channel. Category Icons Select or to display and select a SiriusXM® Radio category. *1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed. 254 Album Art Channel Icons Select or to the previous or next channel. Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time. * Not available on all models Open/Close Icon*1 Displays/hides the detailed information. Skip Icons Select or to change section in the channel. Select and hold to move rapidly within the section. Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display preset 7 onwards. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ To Change the Tune Mode 1Playing SiriusXM® Radio * In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.). 1. Select . 2. Select Tune Mode. 3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode. There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system. Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or select SOURCE on the screen. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 205 Features SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections. Tune Start: When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off from the Audio settings screen. 2 Customized Features P. 324 * Not available on all models Continued 255 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Preset Memory To store a channel: 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store. 3. Select Replace. You can also store a channel by the following procedure. 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store. Features ■ Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) 256 * Not available on all models You can store up to four of your preferred music channels per preset. 1. Tune a station. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number you want to add a music channel. u A message appears if there are no available presets. 5. Select Combine. 1Playing SiriusXM® Radio * You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset memory. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Listening to Featured Channels 1Listening to Featured Channels Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a channel list. 2. Select the Channel List tab. 3. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed. 4. Select the channel. Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be displayed. Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list. Features Continued 257 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Replay Function The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast. 1. Select . 2. Select Playback Position. 3. Move the gauge to the position you want to replay. Features To play or pause on playback mode: 1. Select . 2. Select Play/Pause. 1Replay Function The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point. You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen. After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data. Audio/Information Screen (A) ■ Returning to real-time broadcast 1. Select . 2. Select Play Live Broadcast. (C) (B) (A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment (C): Length stored in memory 258 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Live Sports Alert 1Live Sports Alert While listening to other channel, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams. ■ To set up a favorite team 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportFlash Setup(Favorite Team). 6. Select a team. 1To set up a favorite team Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on. Selecting On(one time) from the customize settings disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON. 2 Customized Features P. 324 You can also set up a favorite team by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Setting. 4. Select the SXM tab. Features ■ To set up an alert message The sports alert function at SiriusXM® mode only. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportFlash Setup(Interrupt). 6. Select On(one time) or On(continue). Continued 259 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ To set up a alert beep 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep). 6. Select On. ■ Traffic and Weather Information Features 260 You can receive traffic and weather information. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select Traffic & Weather Setup. 6. Select the region. u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unset. 1To set up a alert beep You can also set up a alert beep by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Setting. 4. Select the SXM tab. 1Traffic and Weather Information The traffic and weather information function at SiriusXM® mode only. You can also set up the traffic and weather information by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Setting. 4. Select the SXM tab. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Scan Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. 1. Select Scan. 2. Select Scan Channels. u You can select the desired channel by songs using Scan Songs In Presets. To turn off scan, select Cancel. 1Scan The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®. The “Featured Channels” function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®. TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc. Features 261 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Canadian models Playing a CD Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode. Multi-Information Display /AUDIO (Power/Audio) Icon Select to turn the audio system on and off. Audio/Information Screen Features VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume. (Menu) Icon Select to display the menu items. Track Icons Select or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Select and hold to move rapidly within a track. (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. Open/Close Icon*2 Displays/hides the detailed information. Folder Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC. Disc Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot. (Eject) Button Press to eject a CD. *1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. *2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed. 262 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD ■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/ AAC) 1Playing a CD NOTICE 1. Select and select Music Search. Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit. WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file. 2. Select a folder. If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds. Features Folder Selection Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances: • When you select a new folder, file, or track. • When you change the audio mode to CD. • When you insert a CD. Track Selection 3. Select a track. Continued 263 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file. ■ Scan 1. Select . 2. Select Scan. 3. Select a play mode. Features ■ Random/Repeat Select a play mode. ■ To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off. 264 1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Random/Repeat Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat/Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/ file. Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random/Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random order. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod mode. 2 USB Port(s) P. 201 Multi-Information Display Features /AUDIO (Power/Audio) Icon Select to turn the audio system on and off. VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume. Audio/Information Screen (Menu) Icon Select to display the menu items. Open/Close Icon*1 Displays/hides the detailed information. (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. Cover Art Play/Pause Icon Song Icons Select or to change songs. Select and hold to move rapidly within a song. *1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed. Continued 265 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List 1. Select and select Music Search. 1Playing an iPod Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system. If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 296 Category Selection Features 2. Select the items on that menu. If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/ USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay. Item Selection 266 If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file. Select a play mode. Select the mode you want to turn off. Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order. Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order. Repeat Song: Repeats the current track. Features ■ To turn off a play mode 1How to Select a Play Mode 267 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) Models with navigation system TM Song By Voice (SBV) Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice commands. 1Song By VoiceTM (SBV) Setting options: • On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands ■ To enable SBV are available. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Song by Voice. 6. Select On or Off. Features 268 • Off: Disable the feature. uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) ■ Searching for music using SBV 1Searching for music using SBV Song By VoiceTM Commands List 2 Song By Voice Commands P. 249 NOTE: Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks stored on the USB flash drive or iPod. You can add phonetic modifications of difficult words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands. 2 Phonetic Modification P. 270 Features 1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On. 2. Press the (Talk) button and say “Music Search” to activate the SBV feature for the USB flash drive and iPod. 3. Press the button and say a command. u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a list of songs by that artist. Select the desired song to start playing. u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start playing songs by that artist. 4. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/back) button on the steering wheel. The selected song continues playing. Once you have canceled this mode, you need to press the button and say “Music Search” again to re-activate this mode. Continued 269 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) ■ Phonetic Modification Features 270 Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Song by Voice Phonetic Modification. 6. Select New Modification. 7. Select USB or iPod. 1Phonetic Modification Song by Voice Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By Voice is set to Off. You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification items. uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) Features 8. Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist). u The list of the selected item appears on the screen. 9. Select an entry to modify. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. u The listen to the current phonetic modification, select Play. u To delete the current phonetic modification, select Delete. 10. Select Modify. 11. Select the phonetic spelling you want to use (e.g., ”Artist A”) when prompted. 12. Select OK. u The artist “No Name” is phonetically modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV mode, you can press the (Talk) button and use the voice command “Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the artist “No Name.” 271 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora® U.S. models Playing Pandora® 1Playing Pandora® Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a compatible smartphone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using your USB cable to the USB port. 2 Phone Setup P. 385 2 USB Port(s) P. 201 Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora website for more information. To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. Multi-Information Display Cover Art Features Audio/Information Screen /AUDIO (Power/ Audio) Icon Select to turn the audio system on and off. Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or composers and Pandora® will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout. VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume. (Menu) Icon Select to display the menu items. (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. STATION Up/Down Icons Select to change a station. 272 To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com for more information. Like/Dislike Icons Select to evaluate a song. Play/Pause Icon Select to resume or play a song. Skip Icon Select to skip a song. If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected. If your phone is connected to Android Auto, Pandora will be available only through the Android Auto interface. Visit the Android Auto website to check compatibility. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora® ■ Pandora® Menu 1Pandora® Menu You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio system. The available items are: • Bookmark • Station List • New Station • Sound • Setting ■ Operating a menu item * Not available on all models If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 Pandora® * P. 297 Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play. To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu, select Station List, and then select a new station. It also changes stations on the main Pandora® screen. Features 1. Select . 2. Select an item. Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system. 273 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode. 2 USB Port(s) P. 201 Multi-Information Display Features /AUDIO (Power/Audio) Icon Select to turn the audio system on and off. VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume. Audio/Information Screen (Menu) Icon Select to display the menu items. Open/Close Icon*2 Displays/hides the detailed information. (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. Folder Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to the beginning of the previous folder. to skip *1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. *2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed. 274 Track Icons Select or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List 1. Select 1Playing a USB Flash Drive and select Music Search. Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 299 WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file. If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 296 Folder Selection 2. Select a folder. Features Select Switch USB Device in the Audio menu screen to switch to another USB device. Track Selection 3. Select a track. Continued 275 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file. ■ Scan 1. Select . 2. Select Scan. 3. Select a play mode. Features ■ Random/Repeat Select a play mode. ■ To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off. 276 1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder. Random/Repeat Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order. Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file. uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio Playing Bluetooth® Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. 2 Phone Setup P. 385 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible. To check if your phone is compatible, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/. It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving. Multi-Information Display Audio/Information Screen Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume. Open/Close Icon*1 Displays/hides the detailed information. (Menu) Icon Select to display the menu items. (Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display. Track Icons Select or to change tracks. Play Icon Pause Icon Group Icons*1 Select or to change group. *1:Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed. Continued The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be different. Features /AUDIO (Power/ Audio) Icon Select to turn the audio system on and off. Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected. If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play. In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly. Some functions may not be available on some devices. If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone will be unavailable. However, you can have a second previously paired phone stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting Connect from Bluetooth Device List. 2 Phone Setup P. 385 277 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio ■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files 1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system. 1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions. 2 Phone Setup P. 385 2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode. If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected. You can change the connected phone in the Bluetooth® settings on the Audio menu screen by the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Setting. Features ■ To pause or resume a file Select the play icon or pause icon. ■ Searching for Music 1Searching for Music 1. Select . 2. Select Music Search. 3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums). 4. Select an item. u The selection begins playing. 278 Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone. Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed. uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® HondaLink® HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®. 2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 284 2 Phone Setup P. 385 1HondaLink® The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones. Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package. ■ HondaLink® Menu When Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is connected to the audio system, HondaLink® can be accessed even without a Wi-Fi connection. Features ■ Places * Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealer, and so on. You can also navigate to the found locations via the navigation. ■ Vehicle Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service. ■ Help & Support Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service center. * Not available on all models Continued 279 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® ■ Messages from Honda Displays helpful and important information from Honda. ■ Weather Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can change the ZIP Code at any time. ■ To Connect to HondaLink® Service Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service. ■ To enable the HondaLink® service Features 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock/Info. 4. Select the HondaLink tab. 5. Select Diagnostic & Location Data. 6. Select On. You need to allow the consent of the location service to enable the HondaLink® service. Cancel: Does not allow this consent. Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Never show again.) 280 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® ■ To link with HondaLink® You can see the Connection Guide screen after launching HondaLink®. If you do not need this guide, select check-box and select OK. Features Continued 281 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® ■ Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation. 1. A message appears and notifies you of a new message on the header area. u When the message is received, a notification ring can be heard. Message Icon (yellow) Features 282 2. A message icon is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read. uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® 3. From the top of the screen, swipe down to see the messages. 4. Select a new message to open. Features 283 uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection Wi-Fi Connection You can connect the Display Audio to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites or use online services on the audio/information screen. If your phone has cell hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to setup. ■ Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time) Features 284 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi. 4. Select the Wi-Fi tab. 5. Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, then On. 6. Select Wi-Fi Network List. u Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode. u Select the phone you want to connect to the system. u If you do not find the phone you want to connect in the list, select Scan. 7. Select Connect. u Enter a password for your phone, and select OK. u When the connection is successful, the icon is displayed on the list. 8. Select to go back to the home screen. 1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time) You cannot go through the setting procedure while a vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the Wi-Fi connection. Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package. Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity. You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or off with the icon on Wi-Fi Network List. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen. uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection ■ Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made) Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode. 1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made) iPhone users You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi-Fi connection again after you boot your phone. Features 285 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free Siri® Eyes Free You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. 1Siri® Eyes Free Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc. 2 Phone Setup P. 385 Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri. ■ Using Siri Eyes Free While driving we recommend only using Siri through the button on the steering wheel (Siri Eyes Free). (Hang-up/back) Button Press to deactivate Siri. Appears when Siri is activated in Siri Eyes Free Features (Talk) Button Press and hold until the display changes as shown. 286 While in Siri Eyes Free: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appears. 1Using Siri Eyes Free Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps. uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM Apple CarPlayTM If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via USB, you can use the audio/information touch screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages. 1Apple CarPlayTM Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay. 2 USB Port(s) P. 201 Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps. ■ Apple CarPlay Menu Home screen Apple CarPlay menu screen Apple CarPlay icon Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen ■ Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail. ■ Messages To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function, press Phone on the home screen. While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone. 2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 288 Features : Go back to the Home screen To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the front USB port. The USB port located in the center console storage will not enable Apple CarPlay operation. 2 USB Port(s) P. 201 When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected. 2 Phone Setup P. 385 Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you. ■ Music Play music stored on your iPhone. For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage. Continued 287 uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM ■ Maps 1Apple CarPlayTM Display Apple CarPlay map and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone. Models with navigation system Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. Features ■ Setting Up Apple CarPlay After you have connected your iPhone to the system via USB, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the Display Audio Screen. ■ Enabling Apple CarPlay Cancel: Does not allow this consent. Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.) You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu. 288 Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply. Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality. It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps. 1Setting Up Apple CarPlay You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlay: Select HOME Settings Smartphone Apple CarPlay Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple’s Privacy Policy. uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM ■ Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Eyes Free Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri Eyes Free. 1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Eyes Free Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri Eyes Free: • What movies are playing today? • Call dad at work. • What song is this? • How’s the weather tomorrow? • Read my latest email. • Find a table for four tonight in Chicago. For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri. Features (Talk) button: Press and hold to activate Siri Eyes Free. Press again to deactivate Siri Eyes Free. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system. 289 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM Android AutoTM When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via USB, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information touch screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto. 2 USB Port(s) P. 201 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 292 1Android AutoTM To use Android Auto, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone. Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android Auto phone. Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps. Features To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the front USB port. The USB port in the center console storage will not enable Android Auto operation. 2 USB Port(s) P. 201 To directly access the Android Auto phone function, press Phone on the home screen. 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 292 When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is connected. 2 Phone Setup P. 385 290 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM ■ Android Auto Menu 1Android AutoTM 6 For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage. Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply. : Go back to the Home screen Android Auto icon Models with navigation system Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination. b Phone (Communication) Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail. c Google Now (Home screen) Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when they’re needed. Continued Features a Maps (Navigation) Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs. Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality. It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps. 291 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM d Music and audio Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto. To switch between music apps, press this icon. e Go back to the Home Screen. f Voice Operate Android Auto with your voice. ■ Auto Pairing Connection When you connect an Android phone to the unit via USB, Android Auto is automatically initiated. Features ■ Enabling Android Auto 1Enabling Android Auto Cancel: Does not allow this consent. Enable once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.) Always enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.) You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu. Only initialize Android Auto when you safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone. You can use the method below to change Android Auto settings after you have completed the initial setup: Select HOME Settings Smartphone Android Auto Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy. 292 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM ■ Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition Press and hold the talk button to operate Android Auto with your voice. 1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition: • Reply to text. • Call my wife. • Navigate to Honda. • Play my music. • Send a text message to my wife. • Call flower shop. For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage. Features (Talk) button: Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system. You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen. 293 uuAudio System Basic OperationuTruck Bed Audio System * Truck Bed Audio System * When the vehicle is stopped or moving at speeds up to 9 mph (15 km/h), audio can be played from the truck bed. ■ Truck Bed Audio System Setup 1. Check that the shift lever is in (P . 2. Select . 3. Select Truck Bed Audio. Features 294 4. Select On or Off. * Not available on all models 1Truck Bed Audio System * After the setting has been completed, screen will time out in 30 seconds. Audio Error Messages Canadian models CD Player If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages. Error Message Unplayable File Bad Disc Please check Owner’s Manual Please push eject button Cause Track/file format not supported Mechanical error Solution ● Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file plays automatically. ● Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the error message is cleared. Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the disc again. ● 2 Protecting CDs P. 301 Mecha Error ● Bad Disc Please Check Owner’s Manual Servo error Check Disc Disc error Heat Error High temperature ● ● If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed, contact a dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player. Features ● Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed. 2 Protecting CDs P. 301 ● Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until the error message is cleared. 295 uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive iPod/USB Flash Drive If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer. Error Message Solution Features USB Error Appears when there is a problem with the audio system. Check if the device is compatible with the audio system. Bad USB Device*1 The connected USB device has a problem. See Owner's Manual*2 Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error. Unsupported Ver*1 Unsupported Version*2 Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version. Connect Retry*2 Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod. Unplayable File Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about three seconds, then plays the next song. iPod Appears when the iPod is empty. USB flash drive No Data Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash drive. iPod and USB flash drive Check that compatible files are stored on the device. Unsupported Ver*1 Unsupported*2 *1:Models with color audio system *2:Models with Display Audio 296 Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is connected, reconnect the device. uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora® * Pandora® * If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer. Error Message Solution To begin listening, create a new genre station. Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station. Unable to rate track. Please try again. Skip limit reached. Appears when you try to skip a song or select Like/Dislike over the predetermined number of times in an hour. Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later. Unable to retrieve a track explanation. Please try again later. Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later. Unable to create bookmark. Please try again later. Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot the app and reconnect the device. Pandora App version is not supported Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora® to the latest version. Unable to complete the operation. Please try again later. Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later. Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped, check your mobile phone. * Not available on all models Features No Device Connected Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your device. Appears when Pandora® app is not installed on your device. Install Pandora® app to the your device. 297 uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps Models with Display Audio Android/Apps If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer. Error Message Unfortunately, **** has stopped.*1 **** is not responding. Would you like to close it?*1 Features 298 Solution Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app. App is not responding. Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data Reset. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 348 *1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs. General Information on the Audio System SiriusXM® Radio Service * ■ Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio 1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the screen, select Channel to 0. 2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to subscribe. ■ Receiving SiriusXM® Radio ■ SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages Channel Not Subscribed: You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription Update: SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network. Channel Not Available: No such channel exits, or the artist or title information is unavailable. No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Antenna Disconnected: The SiriusXM® antenna is disconnected. Contact a dealer. * Not available on all models Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio: • US: SiriusXM® Radio at www.sirius.com/subscribenow, or 1-855-2369236 • Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.sirius.ca/subscribe-now, or 1-877-209-0079 1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator. You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances: • In a location with an obstruction to the south of your vehicle. • In tunnels • On the lower level of a multi-tiered road • Large items carried on the roof rack Features Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the SOURCE button on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception. 1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio 299 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs Canadian models Recommended CDs • Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. • Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. • Play only standard round-shaped CDs. The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks. ■ CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC files Features 300 • Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. • Some versions of MP3, WMA or AAC formats may be unsupported. 1Recommended CDs A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not play either. uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs ■ Protecting CDs Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: • Store a CD in its case when it is not being played. • When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge. • Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface. • Never insert foreign objects into the CD player. • Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. • Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. • Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD. 1Protecting CDs NOTICE Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside and damage the audio unit. Examples: ● Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick CDs Bubbled/ Wrinkled ● Using Printer Label Kit Sealed With Plastic Ring ● Poor quality Damaged CDs CDs Chipped/ Cracked Small CDs Warped Features ● With Label/ Sticker Burrs 3-inch (8-cm) CD 301 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives ■ iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility Model 1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility This system may not work with all software versions of these devices. iPod (5th generation) iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007) iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008) iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009) iPod nano (1st to 7th generation *) launch in 2012 iPod touch (1st to 5th generation *) launch in 2012 iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5*1/iPhone 5c*1/iPhone 5s*1/ iPhone6*1 Features ■ USB Flash Drives • • • • • Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher. Some digital audio players may not be compatible. Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported. *1: Models with Display Audio 302 * Not available on all models 1USB Flash Drives Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device. uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Honda App License Agreement ■ END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. Features A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services. B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property. 1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT. 2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the “HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE. Continued 303 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE. Features 4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE. 5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use. (a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. 304 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Features (b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not: (1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION; (2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES; (3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way; (4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights; (5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations; (6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or (7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses. 6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers. Continued 305 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments. C. SOFTWARE Operation 1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA. Features 2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information. 3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES. 4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content. 306 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE. 7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void. Features 6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-theair, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings 1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent. Continued 307 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices. Features 3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. 4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash. 308 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement E. Information Collection and Storage 1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you. 2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information. Features (a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals. (b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS. (c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility. Continued 309 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Features F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, noninfringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you. G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights. 1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. 310 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length. Features (a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES. H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES. Continued 311 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. Features J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION. K. Termination and Transfer. 1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. 2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION. 312 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Continued Features M. ARBITRATION: PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION. Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous. 313 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA. This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out. Features 314 N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only. uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Models with Display Audio Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto ■ OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY. Continued Features USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO. 315 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto ■ DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY Features YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. 316 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses Models with Display Audio About Open Source Licenses To see the open source license information, follow these steps. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System, then open the Others tab. 4. Select Detail Information. 5. Select About device. 6. Select Legal information. 7. Select Open source licenses. Features 317 Customized Features Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features. When you customize settings, make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P . Models with color audio system ■ How to customize While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power ON, press the MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings, press the button, then select Phone Setup. Audio/Information Screen 1Customized Features (Phone) Button 1How to customize These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter. To customize other features, select Settings, rotate , then press . 2 List of customizable options P. 321 Features MENU/CLOCK Button Selector Knob 318 uuCustomized Featuresu ■ Customization Flow Press the MENU/CLOCK button. Adjust Clock Settings RDS Settings RDS Information Radio Text Bluetooth Add New Device Connect an Audio Device Features Display Adjustment Brightness Contrast Black Level Rear Camera Camera Guideline Display Change Wallpaper Select Import Delete Color Theme Language Clock Format Continued 319 uuCustomized Featuresu Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press Bluetooth Setup . Add New Device Connect a Phone Connect an Audio Device Disconnect All Devices Delete Device Pass-Key Features Speed Dial Ringtone Caller ID Info System Clear 320 uuCustomized Featuresu ■ List of customizable options Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings Adjusts clock. Adjust Clock — 2 Clock P. 110 RDS Settings Bluetooth Radio Text Add New Device Connect an Audio Device Brightness Display Contrast Adjustment Black Level Rear Camera Camera Guideline Selects whether the RDS information comes on. Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. On*1/Off — See Bluetooth Setup on P. 323 Changes the brightness of the audio/ information screen. Changes the contrast of the audio/ information screen. Changes the black level of the audio/ information screen. Selects whether the guidelines come on the audio/information screen. Features Settings RDS Information — — — On*1/Off *1:Default Setting Continued 321 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Display Change Select Wallpaper Delete Settings Color Theme Language Features 322 Import Clock Format *1:Default Setting Description Changes the display type. Changes the wallpaper type. Selectable Settings Audio*1/Wallpaper Clock*1/Image1/Image2/ Image3 Imports an image file for a new wallpaper. — 2 Wallpaper Setup P. 210 Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Changes the background color of the audio/ information screen. Changes the display language. Selects the digital clock display from 12h to 24h. Image1*1/Image2/Image3 Blue*1/Red/Amber/Gray English*1/French/Spanish 12h*1/24h uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Add New Device Connect a Phone Bluetooth Setup Phone Setup Ringtone Caller ID Info System Clear Pairs a new phone to HFL. 2 Phone Setup P. 358 Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone to HFL. Selectable Settings — — 2 Phone Setup P. 358 Connect an Audio Device Disconnect All Devices Delete Device Pass-Key Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL. — Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. Deletes a paired phone. Changes a pairing code. Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry. — — — 2 Speed Dial P. 367 — Selects the ring tone. Mobile Phone*1/Fixed Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number Name Priority*1/Number as the caller ID. Priority Cancels/Resets all customized items in the — Phone Setup group as default. Features Speed Dial Description *1:Default Setting Continued 323 uuCustomized Featuresu Models with Display Audio ■ How to customize With the power mode in ON, select Settings, then select a setting item. 1Customized Features When you customize settings, make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P . To customize other features, select Settings. 2 List of customizable options P. 333 Features 324 Audio/Information Screen uuCustomized Featuresu ■ Customization flow Select . Display Display Settings Select Settings. Brightness Contrast Black Level Background Color Sound/Beep Guidance Volume Text Message Volume Voice Recog. Volume Beep Volume Voice Recog Features System Voice Prompt Voice Recog. Volume Song by Voice * Song by Voice Phonetic Modification * Phonebook Phonetic Modification Automatic Phone Sync One Press Voice Operation * Not available on all models Continued 325 uuCustomized Featuresu Clock Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock Wallpaper Features Clock Adjustment Clock Format Date Format Auto Time Zone * Manual Time Zone * Auto Daylight Clock Display Clock Location Clock Reset Others Default 326 * Not available on all models Language Touch Panel Sensitivity Detail Information Factory Data Reset uuCustomized Featuresu Driver Assist System Setup * Forward Collision Warning Distance ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Road Departure Mitigation Setting Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep Blind Spot Info * Vehicle Meter Setup Language Selection Adjust Outside Temp Display “Trip A” Reset Timing Features “Trip B” Reset Timing Adjust Alarm Volume Turn by Turn Display * Display km/Miles Driving Position Setup Easy Entry/Exit Memory Position Link * Keyless Access Setup Door Unlock Mode Keyless Access Light Flash Keyless Access Beep Remote Start System On/Off Walk Away Auto Lock * Not available on all models Continued 327 uuCustomized Featuresu Lighting Setup Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity * Auto Headlight On with Wiper On * Auto Light Sensitivity Door Setup Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock Key and Remote Unlock Mode Features Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer Maintenance Info Default 328 * Not available on all models Reset uuCustomized Featuresu Audio Common Sound Audio Source Pop-Up Cover Art Bluetooth Device List FM/AM SXM * HD Radio Mode * RDS INFO Tune Start SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt) SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep) Features SportsFlash Setup(Favorite Team) Traffic & Weather Setup Default * Not available on all models Continued 329 uuCustomized Featuresu Clock/Info Clock Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock Clock Adjustment Clock Format Date Format Auto Time Zone * Manual Time Zone * Wallpaper Auto Daylight Features Clock Display Clock Location Clock Reset HondaLink Diagnostic & Location Data Other Info Screen Preference Default 330 * Not available on all models uuCustomized Featuresu Phone Phone Text/Email Bluetooth Device List Edit Speed Dial Ring Tone Automatic Phone Sync HondaLink Assist Enable Text/Email Select Account New Message Notification Default Rear Camera Features Camera Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline Default LaneWatch * Show with Turn Signal Display Time after Turn Signal Off Reference Line Default Cross Traffic Monitor * * Not available on all models Continued 331 uuCustomized Featuresu Bluetooth/Wi-Fi Bluetooth Bluetooth On/Off Status Bluetooth Device List Edit Pairing Code Wi-Fi Wi-Fi On/Off Status Wi-Fi Network List Wi-Fi Information Default Features Smartphone Apple CarPlay Android Auto 332 uuCustomized Featuresu ■ List of customizable options Setup Group Customizable Features Display Settings Changes the brightness of the audio/information screen. — Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen. — Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information screen. — Background Color Changes the background color of the audio/ information screen. Blue*1/Amber/Red/ Violet Guidance Volume Changes the sound volume. Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation system. 1~6*1~11 Text Message Volume Changes the text/e-mail message reading volume. 1~6*1~11 Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6*1~11 Beep Volume Changes the beep volume. Off*1/1/2/3 Features Sound/ Beep Selectable Settings Brightness Display System Description *1:Default Setting Continued 333 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Features Voice Recog Turns the voice prompt on and off. On*1/Off Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6*1~11 Song by Voice * Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off. On*1/Off Phonebook Phonetic Modification Modifies a voice command for music stored in the system or an iPod/iPhone. — 2 Phonetic Modification P. 270 Modifies a voice command for the phonebook. — 2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 394 Automatic Phone Sync Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL. On*1/Off One Press Voice Operation Changes the setting of the touch screen operation when using the voice operation. On/Off*1 *1:Default Setting 334 Selectable Settings Voice Prompt Song by Voice Phonetic Modification * System Description * Not available on all models uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Description Clock Changes the clock display type. Clock/ Wallpaper Type ● Wallpaper ● ● Clock Analog/Digital*1/Small Digital/Off Time Zone/Galaxy*1/Metallic/ Blank Clock Adjustment Adjusts clock. — Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H /24H Date Format Sets the date format. YYYY/MM/DD/ MM/DD/YYYY*1/ DD/MM/YYYY Auto Time Zone * Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust the clock when driving through different time zones. On*1/Off Manual Time Zone * Changes the time zone manually. Auto Daylight Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to cancel this function. *1 Features System Changes the wallpaper type. Imports an image file for a new wallpaper. Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Selectable Settings — On*1/Off *1:Default Setting * Not available on all models Continued 335 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Clock System Features Others *1:Default Setting 336 Selectable Settings Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On*1/Off Clock Location Changes the clock display layout. Upper Right*1/Upper Left/Lower Right/ Lower Left/Off Clock Reset Resets the clock settings to the factory default. Yes/No Language Changes the display language. English*1/French/ Spanish Touch Panel Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Low*1 Detail Information Displays the Android setting items. Factory Data Reset Default Description Resets all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 348 Cancels/Resets all customized items in the System settings group as default. — Yes/No Yes/No uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Vehicle Customizable Features Driver Assist System Setup * Description Selectable Settings Changes at which distance CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/Short ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC range. On/Off*1 Road Departure Mitigation Setting Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system. Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended. On/Off*1 Blind Spot Info * Changes the setting for the blind spot information. Audible and Visual Alert*1/Visual Alert/ Off Features Forward Collision Warning Distance *1:Default Setting * Not available on all models Continued 337 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Features Meter Setup English*1/French/ Spanish Adjust Outside Temp Display Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees. -5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.) -3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C (Canada) “Trip A” Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and average fuel economy A. With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1 “Trip B” Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and average fuel economy B. With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1 Adjust Alarm Volume Changes the alarm volume, such as the buzzers, warnings, turn signal sound, and so on. High/Mid*1/Low Turn by Turn Display * Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on during the route guidance. On*1/Off Selects the trip computer units. Auto/km/Miles*1 (U.S.) Auto/km*1/Miles (Canada) Display km/Miles *1:Default Setting 338 Selectable Settings Changes the displayed language on the multiinformation display. Language Selection Vehicle Description * Not available on all models uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Driving Position Setup Selectable Settings Moves the seat rearward when you get in/get out of the vehicle. Changes the setting for this feature. On*1/Off Memory Position Link * Turns the driving position memory system on and off. On*1/Off Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s door handle. Driver Door Only*1/ All Doors Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/ lock the doors. On*1/Off Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors. On*1/Off Remote Start System On/ Off Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On*1/Off Walk Away Auto Lock Changes the settings for the automatic locking the doors when you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the smart entry remote. Enable/Disable*1 Features Easy Entry/Exit Vehicle Keyless Access Setup Description *1:Default Setting * Not available on all models Continued 339 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Vehicle Customizable Features Lighting Setup Features Description Selectable Settings Interior Light Dimming Time Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors. 60 sec/30 sec*1/15 sec Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver’s door. 60 sec/30 sec/ 15 sec*1/0 sec Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity * Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position. Min/Low/Mid*1/ High/Max Auto Headlight On with Wiper On * Changes the settings for the wiper operation when the headlights automatically come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position. Off/On*1 Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*1/ Low/Min *1:Default Setting 340 * Not available on all models uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors unlock automatically. All Doors with Driver’s Door Opens*1/All Doors with Shift to P/All Doors with IGN Off/ Off Key and Remote Unlock Mode Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock on the first push of the remote or built-in key. Driver Door*1/All Doors Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. On*1/Off Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening any door. 90 sec/60 sec/30 sec*1 Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service. — Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle group as default. Features With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift from P/ Off Door Setup Mainte nance Info. Selectable Settings Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature. Auto Door Lock Vehicle Description Yes/No *1:Default Setting Continued 341 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Sound Description Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 243 Features Common Audio Source PopUp Audio -6 ~ 0*1 ~ +6 (BASS and TREBLE), RR9~0*1 ~FR9 (FADER), L9~ 0*1~R9 (BALANCE), -6 ~ 0*1 ~ +6 (Center and Subwoofer), Off/Low/Mid*1/ High (Speed Volume Compensation) Selects whether the list of selectable audio source comes on when Audio is selected on the home screen. On/Off*1 Turns the cover art display on and off. On*1/Off iPod or USB mode [Your selected media] Cover Art Bluetooth Device List FM/AM mode Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone. — 2 Phone Setup P. 385 HD Radio Mode * Selects whether the audio system automatically switches to the digital radio waves or receives the analog waves only. Auto*1/Analog RDS INFO Turns on and off the RDS information. On*1/Off FM/AM *1:Default Setting 342 Selectable Settings * Not available on all models uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features SiriusXM® mode Audio SXM * Selectable Settings Tune Start Turns on and off, starts the song from the beginning as you change preset stations. On*1/Off SportsFlash Setup (Interrupt) Turns on and off the sports alert function. Off*1/On (one time)/ On (continue) SportsFlash Setup (Interrupt Beep) Causes the system to beep when there is a sports alert notification. On/Off*1 SportsFlash Setup (Favorite Team) Selects your favorite sports teams. Traffic & Weather Setup Selects the region you want to receive the information. — 2 Live Sports Alert P. 259 Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio settings group as default. Features Default Description — Yes/No *1:Default Setting * Not available on all models Continued 343 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Clock/Wallpaper Type Description Selectable Settings Clock Wallpaper Clock Adjustment Clock Format Date Format Features Clock Auto Time Zone * See System on P. 335, 336 Manual Time Zone * Clock/ Info Auto Daylight Clock Display Clock Location Clock Reset HondaLink Diagnostic & Location Data Turns HondaLink® on and off. On/Off*1 Other Info Screen Preference Changes the information screen type. Info Top/Info Menu*1/Off Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Clock/Info settings group as default. Yes/No Default *1:Default Setting 344 * Not available on all models uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Bluetooth Device List Edit Speed Dial Phone Text/Email Default Selectable Settings Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or disconnects a paired phone. — 2 Phone Setup P. 385 Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry. — 2 Speed Dial P. 391 Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile Phone*1 Automatic Phone Sync Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL. On*1/Off HondaLink Assist Turns HondaLink® Assist on and off. On*1/Off Enable Text/Email Turns the text/e-mail message function on and off. On/Off*1 Select Account Selects a text or e-mail message account. New Message Notification Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail messages. On/Off Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone settings group as default. Yes/No Features Phone Description — *1:Default Setting Continued 345 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Fixed Guideline Description Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear camera monitor. Selectable Settings On*1/Off 2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 512 Rear Camera Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on the rear camera monitor. On*1/Off 2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 512 Features Camera LaneWatch * Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear Camera setting group as default. Yes/No Show with Turn Signal Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a right turn. On*1/Off Display Time after Turn Signal Off Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display stays on after the turn signal lever returns to the center. 0 second*1/2 seconds Reference Line Selects whether the reference lines come on the LaneWatch monitor. On*1/Off Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the LaneWatch group as default. Yes/No Turns on and off the cross traffic monitor. On*1/Off Cross Traffic Monitor * *1:Default Setting 346 * Not available on all models uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Bluetooth On/Off Status Bluetooth Edit Pairing Code Bluetooth/ Wi-Fi Selects to display the Bluetooth® status. Selectable Settings On*1/Off Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone, or creates a security PIN. — 2 Phone Setup P. 385 Edits a pairing code. 2 To change the pairing code setting P. 386 Random/Fixed*1 Wi-Fi On/Off Status Changes the Wi-Fi mode. On/Off*1 Wi-Fi Network List Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi network. — Wi-Fi Information Shows the Wi-Fi information of the head unit. — Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Bluetooth/Wi-Fi group as default. Apple CarPlay Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection. — Android Auto Sets up the Android Auto connection. — Features Wi-Fi Smart phone Bluetooth Device List Description Yes/No *1:Default Setting 347 uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings Models with Display Audio Defaulting All the Settings Features 348 Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Factory Data Reset. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. 6. Select Yes to reset the settings. 7. Select Yes again to reset the settings. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select OK. u After selecting OK, the system will reboot. 1Defaulting All the Settings When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data. If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default. If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it becomes off line. 2 HondaLink® P. 279 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems. ■ Important Safety Precautions 1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it. Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer. Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage. * Not available on all models Features When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path. 349 uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink Training HomeLink Models without moonroof Red Indicator If it is necessary to erase a previously entered learned code: • Press and hold the two outside buttons for about 20 seconds, until the red indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1. • If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1. Models with moonroof Features Red Indicator The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515. 350 uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink ■ Training a Button 1Training HomeLink Retraining a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure: 1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program. 2. Press and release the desired HomeLink button. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds. NO YES YES YES NO NO Press and release the HomeLink button. Press and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds. 4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. Training Complete HomeLink LED is constantly on. 5. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate. Training Complete HomeLink indicator rapidly blinks. A. The remote has a rolling code. Press the “learn” button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener). B. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs. Standard transmitter Rolling code transmitter Indicator remains on for about 25 secs. Indicator remains on for about 25 secs. 2. Quickly release the HomeLink button and follow steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.” You do not need to press and release the HomeLink button again in step 2. Features 3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a sec. Does the device (garage door opener) work? 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink. Erasing Codes To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink (about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes before selling the vehicle. If you have any problems, see the device’s instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call HomeLink at (800) 355-3515. HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. 351 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Models with color audio system 1Using HFL Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone. To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: • U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. • Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876. Using HFL ■ HFL Buttons Volume up Volume down Place your phone where you can get good reception. Microphone Voice control tips • Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the Features (Phone) Button (Talk) Button (Hang-up/Back) Button (Pick-up) Button Selector Knob (Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an incoming call. (Hang-up/Back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. (Phone) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press . 352 windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone. • Press and release the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep. • If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted. • To change the volume level, use the audio system’s volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel. State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL ■ HFL Status Display Battery Level Status 1Using HFL The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call. Signal Strength Roaming Status Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. HFL Mode Caller’s Name Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped. Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion. 2 Speed Dial P. 367 Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled. 2 Speed Dial P. 367 Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. Features ■ Limitations for Manual Operation If you receive a call while using the audio system, the system resumes its operation after ending the call. HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended. 1HFL Status Display The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models. You can change the system language. 2 Customized Features P. 318 353 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus HFL Menus 1HFL Menus The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system. To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked. or Phone Speed Dial*1 Add New Features (Existing entry list) Call History*1 Call History Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number. Phone Number Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number. Dialed Calls Display the last 20 outgoing calls. Received Calls Display the last 20 incoming calls. Missed Calls Display the last 20 missed calls. Phonebook*1 Display the paired phone’s phonebook. Dial*1 Enter a phone number to dial. *1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. 354 Some functions are limited while driving. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Redial*1 Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history. Phone Setup Bluetooth Setup Pair a phone to the system. Connect a Phone Connect a phone to the system. Features Add New Device Connect an Audio Device Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the system. Disconnect All Devices Disconnect a paired device from the system. Delete Device Delete a previously paired device. Pass-key Change a pairing code. *1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. Continued 355 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Speed Dial*1 Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number. Phone Number Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number. Features Existing entry list Change Speed Dial *1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. 356 Add New Call History Change a previously stored speed dial number. Delete Speed Dial Delete a previously stored speed dial number. Store Voice Tag Create a voice tag for a speed dial number. Change Voice Tag Change a voice tag for a speed dial number. Delete Voice Tag Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Ringtone System Clear Select the ring tone stored in the connected cell phone. Fixed Select the ring tone stored in HFL. Name Priority Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID. Number Priority Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the caller ID. Features Caller ID Info Mobile Phone Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security codes. Continued 357 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phone Setup 1Phone Setup ■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no Features phone paired to the system) 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 3. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth® device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink. 5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone. 6. A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful. 358 Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls. Phone Pairing Tips: • You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving. • Up to six phones can be paired. • Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is connected to HFL. • If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle. Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following: : The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system) 1. Press the button or the button. u If a prompt appears asking to connect to a phone, select No and proceed with step 2. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . 5. Rotate . Features 4. Rotate to select Add New Device, then press . u The screen changes to device list. to select Add New, then press Continued 359 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus 6. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth® device. Features 7. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink. 8. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by a phone. 360 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To change the currently paired phone 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . Features 4. Rotate to select Connect a Phone, then press . u The screen changes to a device list. 5. Rotate to select a desired device name, then press . u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone. Continued 361 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To change the pairing code setting 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . 4. Rotate . to select Pass-Key, then press Features 5. Input a new pairing code, then press 362 . uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To delete a paired phone 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . 4. Rotate to select Delete Device, then press . u The screen changes to a device list. 5. Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press . Features 6. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . Continued 363 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Ring Tone You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Ringtone, then press . 4. Rotate to select Mobile Phone or Fixed, then press . Features 364 ■ Caller’s ID Information You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming call. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Caller ID Info, then press . 4. Rotate to select a mode you want, then press . 1Ring Tone Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the mobile phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected. 1Caller’s ID Information Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is stored in the phonebook. Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is displayed. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To Clear the System All speed dial entries, all imported phonebook data, all call history data, paired phones, pairing codes, caller’s ID settings, and volume settings are reset as default. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select System Clear, then press . 4. Rotate to select Yes, then press . Features 5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 6. A notification appears on the screen. Press . Continued 365 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL. 1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name. Pref Fax Home Car Mobile Other Work Voice Features Pager If a name has four or more numbers, ... appears instead of category icons. On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL. The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call. 366 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Speed Dial 1Speed Dial When a voice tag is stored, you can press the button and call the number using voice commands. Features Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select Add New, then press . 4. Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press . From Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Phonebook: u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook. From Phone Number: u Input the number manually. 5. When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to say the name for the speed dial entry. Continued 367 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To edit a speed dial 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Change Speed Dial, then press . 6. Select a new speed dial number, then press . Features ■ To delete a speed dial number Change Speed Dial Delete Speed Dial Store Voice Tag 368 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial, then press . u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed Change Speed Dial Delete Speed Dial Store Voice Tag dial number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. Change Cha nge e Sp Speed peed ee Di Dial al Delete Speed Del ete Sp peed ee Di Dial al 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Change Voice Tag, then press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. Continued Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using “home” as a voice tag. It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.” Features ■ To change a voice tag 1Speed Dial 369 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To delete a voice tag 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag, then press . u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . Features 370 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Making a Call 1Making a Call You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial. Voice-tagged speed dial entries can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts. Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers. Features Continued 371 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using the imported Features phonebook When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press . 3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically. Rotate to select the initial, then press . 4. Rotate to select a name, then press . 5. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically. ■ To make a call using a phone number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select a number, then press . 4. Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically. 372 1To make a call using the imported phonebook This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands. 2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 353 2 Speed Dial P. 367 1To make a call using a phone number This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands. 2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 353 2 Speed Dial P. 367 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using redial 1To make a call using redial 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Redial, then press u Dialing starts automatically. . ■ To make a call using the call history Continued 1To make a call using the call history The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.) Features Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Call History, then press . 3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received Calls, or Missed Calls, then press . 4. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically. Press and hold the button to redial the last number dialed in your phone’s call history. 373 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically. Features 374 1To make a call using a speed dial entry When a voice tag is stored, press the button and call the number using voice commands. 2 Speed Dial P. 367 Voice-tagged speed dial entries can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Receiving a Call HFL Mode 1Receiving a Call When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds and the Incoming Call screen appears. Press the Press the button to answer the call. button to decline or end the call. Caller’s Name Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the button again to return to the current call. Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call. Continued Features You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons. Rotate to select the icon, then press . 375 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Options During a Call Features 376 The following options are available during a call. Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone. Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. 1. To view the available options, press the button. 2. Rotate to select the option, then press . u The check box is checked when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off. 1Options During a Call Dial Tones: Available on some phones. Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Models with Display Audio 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone. Place your phone where you can get good reception. Using HFL To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities, ask a dealer or your Honda dealer. ■ HFL Buttons Button SOURCE Button Volume up To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status setting must be On. 2 How to customize P. 324 (Menu) Button Volume down Microphone (Talk) Button Features Voice control tips • Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphones. • Press the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep. • If the microphones pick up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted. • To change the volume level, select the audio system’s VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on the steering wheel. (Hang-up/Back) Button Up to five speed dial entries can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled. 2 Speed Dial P. 391 (Pick-up) Button Up to five call histories can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled. Continued 377 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL (Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen, or to answer an incoming call. (Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. (Menu) button: Press to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial on the phone screen. button: Press to select an item displayed on the phone screen. SOURCE button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone screen. Features 378 To go to the Phone menu screen: 1. Select . 2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen. 3. Select . 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL ■ HFL Status Display 1HFL Status Display The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call. Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. HFL Mode Caller’s Name Battery Level Status The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models. You can change the system language. 2 How to customize P. 324 Signal Strength Roaming Status Caller’s Number Features ■ Limitations for Manual Operation Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped. Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion. 2 Speed Dial P. 391 379 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus HFL Menus The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system. 1HFL Menus To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked. ■ Phone settings screen 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Phone. Some functions are limited while driving. Features Phone Bluetooth Device List (Existing entry list) Connect Phone/Audio Connect Phone Connect Audio Connect a paired device to the system. Disconnect Disconnect a paired phone from the system. Delete Add Bluetooth Device 380 Delete a paired phone. Pair a new phone to the system. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Edit Speed Dial (Existing entry list) Edit Edit a previously stored speed dial number. ● ● ● Delete New Entry Ring Tone Automatic Phone Sync HondaLink Assist Delete a previously stored speed dial number. Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number. Import from Call History Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Import from Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number. Features Delete All Manual Input Change a name. Change a number. Create or delete a voice tag. Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number. Select the ring tone. Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL. Turn HondaLink® Assist on and off. Continued 381 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Text/Email Enable Text/Email Select Account New Message Notification Default Features 382 Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off. Select a mail or text message account. Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail message. Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone settings group as default. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phone menu screen 1. Select . 2. Select Phone. 3. Select . Speed Dial Dial the selected number in the speed dial list. (Existing entry list) Manual Input Import from Call History Import from Phonebook Phonebook Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number. Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Features New Entry Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number. Display the paired phone’s phonebook. Redial Redial the last number dialed. Dial Enter a phone number to dial. Call History All Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls. Dialed Display the last outgoing calls. Received Display the last incoming calls. Missed Display the last missed calls. Continued 383 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Text/Email (Existing a message list) Read/Stop System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read. See the previous message. See the next message. Reply Features 384 Call Select Account Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases. Make a call to the sender. Select a mail or text message account. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phone Setup 1Phone Setup ■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no Continued Phone Pairing Tips: • You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving. • Up to six phones can be paired. • Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to the system. • If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle. Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following: Features phone paired to the system) 1. Select . 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Yes. 4. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then select Continue. u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth® device. 5. Select your phone when it appears on the list. u If your phone does not appear, you can select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, select Phone Not Found and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, search for HandsFreeLink. 6. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone. Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive handsfree calls. : The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth compatible devices is unavailable and Add Bluetooth Device is grayed out from the Bluetooth device list screen. 385 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To change the currently paired phone 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 2. Select Bluetooth Device List. 3. Select a phone to connect. u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone. 4. Select Connect , Connect , or Connect . ■ To change the pairing code setting Features 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi. 4. Select the Bluetooth tab. 5. Select Edit Pairing Code. 6. Select Random or Fixed. 386 1To change the currently paired phone If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again. To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device from the Bluetooth device list screen. 1To change the pairing code setting The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting. To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one. For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 2. Select Bluetooth Device List. 3. Select a phone you want to delete. Continued Features 4. Select Delete. 5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes. 387 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options ■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail function 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 1To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options To use the text/e-mail message function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone. 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable Text/Email. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen. 3. Select On or Off. ■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice Features 388 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 2. Select the Text/Email tab, then New Message Notification. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen. 3. Select On or Off. 1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Ring Tone 1Ring Tone Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the mobile phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected. You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 2. Select Ring Tone. 3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone. Features Continued 389 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History ■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On: When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system. 1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name. Features Pref Fax Home Car Mobile Other ■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync Work Voice setting 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. Pager Blank 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 2. Select Automatic Phone Sync. On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system. The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call. 3. Select On or Off. 390 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Speed Dial 1Speed Dial When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag name. Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Go to the Phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 383 Features 2. Select Speed Dial. 3. Select New Entry. From Import from Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input: u Input the number manually. From Import from Phonebook: u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook. 4. When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Select Yes or No. 5. Select Record to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry. u Using the button, follow the prompts to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry. Continued 391 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit. 4. Select Voice Tag. u From the pop-up menu, select Record. 5. Select Record, or use the button and follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. Features ■ To delete a voice tag 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit. 4. Select Voice Tag. u From the pop-up menu, select Clear. 5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes. 392 1Speed Dial Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using “home” as a voice tag. It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name. For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.” uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To edit a speed dial 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit. 4. Select a setting you want. ■ To delete a speed dial 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 Continued Features 2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Delete. 4. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes. 393 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phonebook Phonetic Modification Features 394 Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands. ■ To add a new voice tag 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to add phonetic modification to. 1Phonebook Phonetic Modification You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus 7. Select New Voice Tag. 8. Select a contact name you want to add to. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 9. Select Modify. 10. Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. 11. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK. Features Continued 395 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To modify a voice tag Features 396 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to modify phonetic modification. 7. Select a contact name you want to modify. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 8. Select Modify. 9. Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. 10. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK. 11. Select OK. 1Phonebook Phonetic Modification You can only modify or delete contact names for the currently connected phone. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To delete a modified voice tag Continued Features 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to delete phonetic modification. 7. Select a contact name you want to delete. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 8. Select Delete. u The selected contact name has been selected. 9. Select OK. 397 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To delete all modified voice tags Features 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to delete phonetic modification. u The contact name list appears. 7. Select Delete All. 8. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select Yes. 1Making a Call ■ Making a Call You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial. Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from most screens. Press the button and say the voice tag name. Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers. While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple CarPlay. 398 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using the imported AAA BBB CCC phonebook 1. Go to the Phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 383 Features 2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select a name. u You can also search by letter. Select Search. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering name, if multiple numbers exist select a number. 4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically. ■ To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the Phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 383 2. Select Dial. 3. Select a number. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers. 4. Select Dial. u Dialing starts automatically. Continued 399 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using redial 1. Go to the Phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 383 1To make a call using redial Press and hold the number dialed. button to redial the last 2. Select Redial. u Dialing starts automatically. ■ To make a call using the Call History Features Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed. 1. Go to the Phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 383 1To make a call using the Call History The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.) 2. Select Call History. 3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed. 4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically. ■ To make a call using a Speed Dial entry 1. Go to the Phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 383 2. Select Speed Dial. 3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically. 400 1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry When a voice tag is stored, press the call the number using the voice tag. 2 Speed Dial P. 391 button to Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Receiving a Call 1Receiving a Call When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming call screen appears. Press the Press the button to answer the call. button to decline or end the call. Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the button again to return to the current call. Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call. You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons. 1Options During a Call The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone. Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system. The available options are shown on the lower Mute Icon half of the screen. Touch Tones: Available on some phones. Features ■ Options During a Call You can select the icons on the audio/information screen. Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off. Continued 401 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Receiving a Text/E-mail Message Features 402 HFL can display newly received text or e-mail messages as well as the last 20 messages received on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase. 1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text or e-mail message. 2. Select Read to listen to the message. u The text or e-mail message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading out the message. 3. To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop. 1Receiving a Text/E-mail Message The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud. The system can only receive messages that are sent a text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list. With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 of the last text and/or e-mail messages received. State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/email message feature. Only use the text/e-mail message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely. When you receive a text or e-mail message for the first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Message Notification setting to On. 2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice P. 388 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Selecting a Mail Account 1Selecting a Mail Account If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to be active and receive notifications. 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. You can also select a mail account from the folder list screen or the message list screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Select Account. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen. 3. Select Text Messages or an e-mail account you want. Select Account Features You can only receive notifications from one text message or mail account at a time. Continued 403 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Displaying Messages Message List 1Displaying Messages ■ Displaying text messages The 1. Go to the Phone menu screen. If you delete a message on the phone, the message will also be deleted from the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phone’s outbox. 2 Phone menu screen P. 383 2. Select Text/Email. u Select account if necessary. 3. Select a message. u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading the message aloud. Text Message Features 404 icon appears next to an unread message. To see the previous or next message, select on the message screen. or uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Folder List ■ Displaying e-mails 1. Go to the Phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 383 Message List 2. Select Text/Email. u Select Select Account if necessary. 3. Select a folder. 4. Select a message. u The e-mail is displayed. The system automatically starts reading the message aloud. Features E-mail Continued 405 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Read or Stop reading a message 1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 404 2. Select Stop to stop reading. Select Read again to start reading the message from the beginning. ■ Reply to a message Features 406 1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 404 2. Select Reply. 3. Select the reply message. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 4. Select Send to send the message. u Message sent appears on the screen when the reply message was successfully sent. 1Reply to a message The available fixed reply messages are as follows: • Talk to you later, I’m driving. • I’m on my way. • I’m running late. • OK • Yes • No You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages. Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones: • U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. • Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Call. Features Continued 407 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ In Case of Emergency 1In Case of Emergency ■ Automatic collision notification If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink® operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition will be sent to the operator; you also can speak to the operator when connected. Features IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink® Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink® Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR. Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink® Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation. 408 Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage. You cannot use this emergency services when: • You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage areas. • There is a problem with the connecting devices, such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself. You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle. 1Automatic collision notification If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds. uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To enable notification 1To enable notification 1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 380 2. Select the Phone tab, then HondaLink Assist. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen. 3. Select On or Off. Setting options: • On: Notification is available. • Off: Disable the feature. Features 409 410 Driving This chapter discusses driving and refueling. Before Driving................................... 412 Towing a Trailer................................ 420 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ..... 432 When Driving Starting the Engine .......................... 434 Precautions While Driving................. 440 Automatic Transmission ................... 441 Shifting ............................................ 442 ECON Button ................................... 444 Intelligent Traction Management...... 445 Cruise Control * ................................ 447 Front Sensor Camera * ...................... 450 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * ......................................452 * Not available on all models Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ....... 457 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * ....470 Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System ............. 478 Agile Handling Assist ....................... 480 Intelligent Variable Torque ManagementTM (i-VTM4TM) AWD System * ............... 481 TPMS with Tire Fill Assist .................. 482 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ......... 484 Blind spot information (BSI) System *....486 LaneWatchTM * .................................. 488 Braking Brake System ................................... 490 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 492 Brake Assist System ......................... 493 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * ..................................... 494 Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped ................................ 503 Parking Sensor System * ................... 504 Cross Traffic Monitor * ..................... 508 Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 512 Refueling Fuel Information .............................. 514 How to Refuel ................................. 515 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions.... 517 411 Before Driving Driving Preparation Check the following items before you start driving. ■ Exterior Checks • Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components. • Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked. • Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear. Driving 412 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 547 • Make sure the tailgate is fully closed when it is not being used as an extended pickup bed. • Make sure the trunk is securely closed and locked. • Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside. 1Exterior Checks NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing. Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole. Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle. uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation ■ Interior Checks 1Interior Checks • Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 121 • Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too. Driving • Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking. • Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving. • If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur. • Securely close and lock all doors. The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician. 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 163 2 Adjusting the front head restraint positions P. 168 • Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position. 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 160 2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 161 Continued 413 uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation • Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. • Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt. 2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 38 • Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated. 2 Indicators P. 74 Driving 414 uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit Maximum Load Limit 2WD without Moonroof models 1Maximum Load Limit The maximum load for your vehicle is 1,444 lbs (655 kg). 3 WARNING 2WD with Moonroof models Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed. The maximum load for your vehicle is 1,400 lbs (635 kg). AWD without Moonroof models The maximum load for your vehicle is 1,543 lbs (700 kg). AWD with Moonroof models The maximum load for your vehicle is 1,477 lbs (670 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb. Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual. Label Example Driving This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. Continued 415 uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit Driving (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. 1Maximum Load Limit 3 WARNING Never let passengers ride in the pickup bed, in the trunk space, or on the bed rails. This could cause very serious injuries or death. No one should ride in any position on your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Exceeding load limits or improperly loading cargo on the vehicle can cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed. Load the cargo carefully before starting to drive. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load. 2 Specifications P. 602 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle. 2 Specifications P. 602 416 uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb. 1Maximum Load Limit Towing a Trailer: See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a trailer. 2 Towing a Trailer P. 420 Load Limits Example Example1 Max Load 1,477 lbs (670 kg) Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg) Cargo Weight 1,177 lbs (534 kg) Max Load 1,477 lbs (670 kg) Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg) Cargo Weight 727 lbs (330 kg) Example2 Driving 417 uuBefore DrivinguCarrying Cargo Carrying Cargo ■ Carrying Cargo in the Pickup Bed Your vehicle can carry a large amount of cargo in the pickup bed. However, the pickup bed is not intended for carrying passengers. People who ride in the pickup bed can be very seriously injured or killed in a crash. • When loading and unloading cargo, make sure all passengers or any objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it. The tailgate should be closed securely before driving when it is not used as the extended pickup bed. • The maximum allowable loading weight for the trunk is 300 lbs (136 kg). Do not exceed this weight limit, or you may damage the trunk. • The maximum allowable loading weight on the pickup bed is 1,100 lbs (500 kg). Do not exceed the load limit. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415 Driving 418 • Distribute cargo evenly on the pickup bed. Place the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible of the rear axle. Tie down and secure all items that could be thrown out of the vehicle during a crash or sudden stop. • If you stack items higher than the bed sides, tailgate, or back window, secure them with a net or cover. This will reduce the risk of items being thrown out of the pickup bed during a crash or sudden stop. • When the tailgate is dropped open, it can be used as an extended pickup bed. The maximum allowable weight on the tailgate while driving is 300 lbs (136 kg). Exceeding this limit could damage the tailgate. • Carrying heavy cargo in the pickup bed will raise your vehicle’s center of gravity. This can affect handling and performance. Drive more slowly and cautiously, and allow extra time and distance for braking. 1Carrying Cargo 3 WARNING Allowing passengers to ride in the pickup bed or on the tailgate can result in death or serious injury in a crash. Make sure all passengers ride in a seat and wear a seat belt properly. 3 WARNING Never let passengers ride in the pickup bed, in the trunk space, or on the bed rails. This could cause very serious injuries or death. No one should ride in any position on your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Exceeding load limits or improperly loading cargo on the vehicle can cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed. Load the cargo carefully before starting to drive. uuBefore DrivinguCarrying Cargo You can also support motorcycles on the pickup bed floor with the cleats. The floor panel of the pickup bed is designed to hold motorcycle tires. Be sure to tighten motorcycles securely, with an approved tie-down or motorcycle strap, according to the motorcycle maker’s instructions. When carrying motorcycles or any other cargo, do not spill any oil or fluid on the pickup bed. A spilled liquid may damage the pickup bed. Driving 419 Towing a Trailer Towing Preparation ■ Towing Load Limits 1Towing Load Limits Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving. ■ Total trailer weight Do not exceed the maximum allowable weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in or on it shown in the table. Towing loads in excess of this can seriously affect vehicle handling and performance and can damage the engine and drivetrain. Total Load Driving Number of occupants 2 4 5 AWD models 2WD models 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) 4,750 lbs (2,154 kg) 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 3,250 lbs (1,474 kg) 3,000 lbs (1,360 kg) Each weight limit is calculated based on the following conditions: • Occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back • Each occupant weights 150 lbs (68 kg) • Each occupant has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area Any additional weight, cargo or accessories reduce the maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load. 420 3 WARNING Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive. Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale. If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo distribution. Refer to the trailer owner’s manual for additional information. Break-in Period Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km). Never exceed the gross weight ratings. Gross weight information 2 Vehicle Specifications P. 602 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation ■ Tongue load The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer on the hitch should be approximately: Boat trailers: 5 – 15% of the total trailer weight Other trailers: 10 – 15% of total trailer weight Tongue Load Load Tongue Number of occupants 2 4 5 AWD models 2WD models 600 lbs (272 kg) 570 lbs (259 kg) 495 lbs (224 kg) 420 lbs (190 kg) 390 lbs (177 kg) 360 lbs (163 kg) Driving Continued 421 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation ■ To estimate the tongue load Excessive tongue load reduces front tire traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway. You can estimate the tongue load by measuring the trailer hitch height from the ground in the following steps: 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. 2. Measure the distance between the ground and the bottom of the trailer hitch. 3. Connect the fully loaded trailer to the hitch. 4. Measure the distance between the ground and the bottom of the trailer hitch again. 5. Subtract the second measurement from the first measurement, then refer to the following table. Driving If the difference is 1 inches (2.5 cm) 1 1/2 inches (3.8 cm) 2 inches (5.1 cm) 2 3/8 inches (6.0 cm) 2 5/8 inches (6.7 cm) AWD models 2WD models 150 lbs (68 kg) 250 lbs (114 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg) 450 lbs (205 kg) — 500 lbs (227 kg) — If the difference becomes more than indicated in the table, distribute the load or remove cargo as needed. 422 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation ■ How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale 1How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale Check each weight in the order indicated as shown. Refer to the table on the right for each weight’s limit except for the tongue load. 2 Tongue load P. 421 1. Front gross axle weight. 4. Gross combined weight. 2. Gross vehicle weight. 3. Rear gross axle weight. 5. Hitched trailer weight. 6. Unhitched trailer weight. Continued Weight limit for 2WD models 3,042 lbs Front gross axle (1,380 kg) 5,710 lbs Gross vehicle (2,590 kg) 3,042 lbs Rear gross axle (1,380 kg) 8,201 lbs Gross combined (3,720 kg) AWD models 3,131 lbs (1,420 kg) 6,019 lbs (2,730 kg) 3,219 lbs (1,460 kg) 9,987 lbs (4,530 kg) If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo distribution. Driving • If you cannot weigh the rear axle, subtract 1 from 2. • The maximum gross combined weight (4) decreases by 2% for every 1,000 feet (305 meters) of elevation. • To calculate the tongue load, subtract 5 from 6. • Refer to the trailer owner’s manual for additional information. Fully load the vehicle and trailer. An attendant who watches the scale is needed as all occupants should stay in the vehicle. 423 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation Models with AWD 1Towing Equipment and Accessories ■ Towing Equipment and Accessories Towing generally requires a variety of supplemental equipment. To ensure the best quality, we recommend that you purchase Honda equipment whenever possible. Your vehicle has a class 3 trailer hitch as standard equipment. The jumper harness and trailer brake fuse are stored in the glove box. 2 Trailer brakes P. 425 7-Pin trailer connector Trailer hitch Open the lid of the socket (located next to the trailer hitch) to expose the 7-pin trailer connector. Lid Driving ■ Hitches Read the trailer manufacturer’s instructions, and select the appropriate draw bar for the height of the trailer you will be towing. 424 Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations. Consult your trailer maker for proper installation and setup of the equipment. Improper installation and setup can affect the handling, stability, and braking performance of your vehicle. Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation. The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician. Trailer packages and products: • Ball mount, hitch plug, hitch pin etc. • Wiring harness kit • Trailer hitch kit (jumper harness included) Are available at a dealer. uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation ■ Weight distribution hitches Your vehicle is designed to tow without the need for a load distributing hitch. If you wish to use one, please consult your trailer maker for proper installation and set-up. Improper set-up could degrade the handling, stability, and braking performance of your vehicle. ■ Safety chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground. ■ Trailer brakes 1Trailer brakes Continued The 4-pin gray connector is located under the instrument panel near the top of the parking brake pedal. Driving Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more: There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard. The 4-pin gray connector installed in your vehicle has all of the circuits required to install most electric trailer brake controllers. 425 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation Trailer brake controller connector’s terminals: Electric Brake (Brown) (20A) Ground (Black) Brake (Light Green) Stop (Violet) Electric Brake (Brown) Driving 426 Ground (Black) Have a qualified mechanic install your trailer brake controller following the trailer brake controller manufacturer’s instructions. Failure to properly install the trailer brake controller may increase the distance it takes for you to stop your vehicle when towing a trailer. Brake (20A) (Blue) The trailer hitch harness is used to install the controller for the electric trailer brakes. Insert the trailer brake fuse into the engine compartment sub fuse box. 2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type B P. 593 Brake Lights (Sky Blue) uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation ■ Trailer light 1Trailer light Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow. (For 2WD Vehicles Only): The trailer lighting connector is located behind the trailer hitch. Even if you are planning to use the non-Honda trailer lighting harness and converter, ask a dealer for the correct connector and pins. Pins’ wiring color codes and their purposes: Left turn signal and brake lights (White) Right turn signal and brake lights (Red) Tail lights (Black) Electric brake (Brown) +B Charge (Green) Ground (Black) Driving Back-up lights (Blue) We recommend that you have a dealer install a Honda wiring harness and converter. They are designed for your vehicle. Continued 427 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation The 7-pin trailer connector is needed for your trailer lights. When inserting the connector to the socket, check if the connector and the socket are free of dirt, moisture, or other foreign material. (For Vehicles Equipped with Trailer Hitch Harness Only): Pins’ wiring color codes and their purposes: Tail lights (Black) +B Charge (Green) 1. Pull the socket lid to open. Socket Driving Left turn signal and brake lights (White) Right turn signal and brake lights (Red) Ground (Black) Electric brake (Brown) Back-up lights (Blue) 3. Hook the lid retaining tab onto the socket retaining tab. 2. Insert the 7-pin trailer connector into the socket. The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician. ■ Sway control This device can be used if your trailer tends to sway. Your trailer maker can tell you what kind of sway control you need and how to install it. Improper installation could degrade the handling and stability of your vehicle. ■ Trailer mirrors Many states, provinces and territories require special exterior mirrors when towing a trailer. Install special mirrors whenever you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot. 428 uuTowing a TraileruTrailer Stability Assist Trailer Stability Assist Helps to stabilize the vehicle and trailer when the trailer severely sways. ■ How trailer stability assist works When the vehicle and trailer become unstable while driving, trailer stability assist determines the cause. If the trailer oscillation is detected as the cause, and the swaying increases, the system applies the brakes or controls engine output to reduce vehicle speed. Both the vehicle and trailer brake lights come on automatically if you brake to reduce vehicle speed. 1Trailer Stability Assist Trailer stability assist is not a function that prevents the vehicle and trailer from swaying. Avoid high speeds, abrupt steering, improper trailer load, and sudden braking to keep the trailer from swaying. When swayed too severely, the system becomes ineffective, and you may lose control of your vehicle, causing the trailer to roll over or get damaged. 2 Driving Safely with a Trailer P. 430 Trailer towing sway is caused by: • Crosswinds • Improper towbar down load • Excessive Speed Driving The VSA® system indicator blinks during the trailer stability assist operation. 2 VSA® Operation P. 478 429 uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer Driving Safely with a Trailer ■ Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer • Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition. • Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits. 2 Towing Load Limits P. 420 • Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer. • Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while driving. • Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly. • Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare. Operating speed when towing a trailer must not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h). Parking In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s tires. When towing a trailer, we recommend that you carry a full-size spare wheel and tire for both your vehicle and trailer. If you use the compact spare tire that came with your vehicle, it could adversely affect vehicle handling. Driving Remember to unhitch the trailer before changing a flat tire. Ask the trailer sales or rental agency where and how to store the trailer’s spare tire. ■ Towing Speeds and Gears • Drive slower than normal. • Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers. • Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads. ■ Turning and Braking • Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal. • Allow more time and distance for braking. • Do not brake or turn suddenly. 430 1Driving Safely with a Trailer 1Towing Speeds and Gears When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds, the trailer may sway or affect vehicle handling. uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle ■ Driving in Hilly Terrain • Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the H mark, turn off the heating and cooling system */climate control system * and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary. • Shift to the D4 position if the transmission shifts frequently. ■ Retrieving a Boat If the vehicle tires slip when retrieving a boat from the water, keep the transmission in (D . This prevents damage to the transmission. Towing Your Vehicle 2 Emergency Towing P. 596 * Not available on all models Driving Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information. 431 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines General Information Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-highway activities. If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement. Important Safety Precautions To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and recommendations: • Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415 Driving 432 • Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts. • Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow. • It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits. 1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines 3 WARNING Improperly operating this vehicle on or offpavement can cause a crash or rollover in which you and your passengers could be seriously injured or killed. • Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owner’s manual. • Keep your speed low, and don’t drive faster than conditions permit. Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover. 2 Important Handling Information P. 32 2 Precautions While Driving P. 440 Spinning the tires excessively can also damage the Intelligent VTM4 (i-VTM4) system. uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble Avoiding Trouble Driving • Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures. • Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in a hazardous situation. • Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control. • Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover or damage to your suspension or other components. • Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually the safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it. Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill. • Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings. • If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose. 433 When Driving Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. Parking Brake 1Starting the Engine Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine. The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters). 2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in (N , it is safer to start it in (P . Driving Brake Pedal 3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal. The engine will crank until it starts. When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and cooling system */climate control system *, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain. If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details. Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry remote is weak. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 579 The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is subjected to strong radio waves. Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine. If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before trying again. 434 * Not available on all models uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine ■ Stopping the Engine 1Starting the Engine You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped. 1. Shift to (P . 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button with your foot on the brake pedal. The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled. 2 Immobilizer System P. 133 Driving Continued 435 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine ■ Remote Engine Start * You can remotely start the engine using the smart entry remote. 1Remote Engine Start * 3 WARNING Engine exhaust contains toxic carbon monoxide. Breathing carbon monoxide can kill you or cause unconsciousness. Never use the remote engine starter when the vehicle is parked in a garage or other area with limited ventilation. Driving If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference. The engine may not start by the remote engine start if: • You have disabled a remote engine start setting using the audio/information screen. • You do not press and hold the button within 5 seconds after the button is pressed. • The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). • The shift lever is in a position other than (P . • The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is unlocked. • You have already used the remote twice to start the engine. • Another registered smart entry remote is in the vehicle. 436 * Not available on all models uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine ■ To start the engine 1Remote Engine Start * Press the button, then press and hold the button. Some exterior lights flash once. Go within the range, and try again. LED: Blinks when any button is pressed. • There is any antenna failure. • The door is unlocked with the built-in key. • The engine oil pressure is low. • The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. • The telematics unit malfunctions. • The security system alarm is not set. The engine may stop while it is running if: • You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of starting the engine with the smart entry remote. • The engine is stopped by using the smart entry remote. Some exterior lights flash six times if the engine runs successfully. unlocked. Some exterior lights will not flash if the engine does not start. The engine runs for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle. To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the button, then press and hold the button. u Some exterior lights come back on three times, twice, if a 10-minute extension request was transmitted successfully. * Not available on all models Continued • You press the shift lever release button. • The telematics unit malfunction. • The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. • The battery is low. • The engine oil pressure is low. • The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) comes on if Driving • There is any antenna failure. • The security system alarm is not set. • The door is unlocked with the built-in key. • The hood is open, or any door, or the trunk is there is a problem with the emissions control systems. 437 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine ■ To stop the engine 1Remote Engine Start * Go within the range, and try again. Press and hold the button for one second. Some exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of the keyless access system range. The engine will not stop. Driving Some exterior lights flash once if the engine stops successfully. 438 * Not available on all models While the engine is running, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is warm outside: • The heating and cooling system */climate control system * is activated in recirculation mode. • The seat ventilation * is activated. When it is cold outside: • The defroster is activated at a moderately warm temperature. • The rear defogger and door mirror heaters * are activated. • The seat heaters * and heated steering wheel * are activated. 2 Heated Steering Wheel * P. 180 2 Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation * P. 182, 183 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine ■ Starting to Drive When the engine was started using the smart entry remote 1. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button simultaneously. When the engine was started in any case 1Starting to Drive When the engine was started using the smart entry remote The engine stops when the shift lever is moved out of (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow the step 1 when starting to drive. 2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake indicator has gone off. 2 Parking Brake P. 490 3. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing. 4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. ■ Hill start assist system 1Hill start assist system Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines. Move the shift lever to (D , D4 , or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal. Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake. Driving Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator. The brakes remain engaged briefly as you release the brake pedal. * Not available on all models 439 uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving Precautions While Driving ■ Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control: • Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle. • Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible. • Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity. • Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof. Never carry more than 165 lbs (75 kg) of cargo on the roof rack (Honda accessory). ■ In Rain Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine, driveline, or cause electrical component failure. Driving ■ Other Precautions If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks. 1Precautions While Driving NOTICE Do not change the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission. NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system. If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle. Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance. During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine or powertrain. Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced. 440 uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission Automatic Transmission ■ Creeping The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped. 1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover. 2 Important Handling Information P. 32 2 Precautions While Driving P. 440 ■ Kickdown Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves. Driving 441 uuWhen DrivinguShifting Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs. You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P . ■ Shift lever positions Release Button Driving 442 Park Used when parking or starting the engine Reverse Used when reversing Neutral Used when idling Drive Used: ● For normal driving (gears change between 1st and 6th automatically) Low ● Strong engine power when climbing and strong engine braking when going down steep hills. D4 Button 1Shifting Drive (D4) Press the D4 button while the shift lever is in (D . Used when: ● Going up or down hills The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake. When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift indicated in the display. Always confirm you are in the correct gear before driving. uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ Shift Lever Operation 1Shift Lever Operation NOTICE Tachometer’s Red Zone Shift Lever Position Indicator When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission. Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away. Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving, a blinking transmission indicator indicates a transmission problem. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible. Shift without pressing the shift lever release button. The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt. Press the shift lever release button and shift. It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first. Driving Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift. 443 uuWhen DrivinguECON Button ECON Button The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off. The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, air conditioning system, and cruise control. Driving 444 * Not available on all models 1ECON Button While in ECON mode, the climate control system * has greater temperature fluctuation. uuWhen DrivinguIntelligent Traction Management Intelligent Traction Management The Intelligent Traction Management optimizes vehicle performance to help you drive on various surfaces. The system has available modes to select from: Normal, Snow, Mud *, and Sand *. Press the mode button to select the appropriate mode. The mode you select appears on the multi-information display. When the vehicle is turned off and restarted, Intelligent Traction Management mode will revert to Normal. 1Intelligent Traction Management Refer to the Off-Highway Driving section for driving tips and safety precautions. 2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 432 AWD models Normal Provides balanced driving performance on most road surfaces. Driving Snow Use when driving on snowy road surfaces. Mud Use when driving on muddy road or offroad surfaces. Mode Button * Not available on all models Sand Use when driving on soft, sandy road or off-road surfaces. 445 uuWhen DrivinguIntelligent Traction Management 2WD models Normal Provides balanced driving performance on most road surfaces. Snow Use when driving on snowy road surfaces. SNOW Button Driving 446 uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control * Cruise Control * Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration. Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~ Always keep sufficient distance between you and the vehicle in front of you. Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather. ■ Shift positions for cruise control: It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed when driving uphill or downhill. In (D How to use 3 WARNING Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash. When to use ■ Vehicle speed for cruise control: 1Cruise Control * When not using cruise control: Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE button. CRUISE MAIN is on in the instrument panel. While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more time to accelerate to maintain the set speed. Cruise control is not available when the Intelligent Traction Management Snow, Mud * or Sand * modes are in operation. ■ Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel. * Not available on all models Driving Cruise control is ready to use. Continued 447 uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control * ■ To Set the Vehicle Speed −/SET Button On when cruise control begins Press and release Driving 448 Take your foot off the pedal and press the −/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the −/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control * ■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed 1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or −/SET buttons on the steering wheel. You can set the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or −/ SET button on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake pedals. To increase speed To decrease speed ■ To Cancel CRUISE Button CANCEL Button To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: • Press the CRUISE button. • Press the CANCEL button. • Depress the brake pedal. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off. Driving • Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). • If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set. 1To Cancel Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. You cannot set or resume in the following situations: • When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) • When the CRUISE button is turned off At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically. 449 uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera * Front Sensor Camera * The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, and CMBSTM, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions. ■ Camera Location and Handling Tips Front Sensor Camera To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it. Driving 450 This camera is located behind the rearview mirror. 1Front Sensor Camera * Never apply a film or attach any objects to windshield, the hood, or the front grill that could obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera’s field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly. Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly. * Not available on all models uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera * 1Front Sensor Camera * If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: message appears: • Use the heating and cooling system */climate control system * to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the air flow directed towards the camera. • Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera. * Not available on all models Driving If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: message appears: • Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 451 uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether. ■ How the System Works The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane. Driving As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the multi-information display. If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking. u Braking is applied only when the lane markings are solid continuous lines. The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings. If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you. 452 * Not available on all models 1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations. Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane. The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions. You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions: 2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 455 There are times when you may not notice RDM functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions. uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * ■ How the System Activates 1How the System Activates The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the following conditions are met: • The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). • The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. • The turn signals are off. • The brake pedal is not depressed. • The wipers are not in continuous operation. • The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating, braking or steering. The RDM system may automatically shut off and the indicator comes and stays on. 2 Indicators P. 84 The RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is: • Not driven within a traffic lane. • Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of a lane. • Driven in a narrow lane. Driving Continued 453 uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * ■ RDM On and Off Indicator RDM Button Driving 454 1RDM On and Off Press the RDM button to turn the system on and off. u The indicator in the button comes on and the message appears on the multiinformation display when the system is on. When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the audio/information screen, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking. uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * ■ RDM Conditions and Limitations The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. ■ Environmental conditions • • • • • • • • • Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the front windshield. Driving Continued 455 uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * ■ Roadway conditions • Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). • Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. • Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings. • The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk). • The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. • The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. • The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. • Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. • When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines). • When driving on roads with double lines. Driving 456 ■ Vehicle conditions • Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. • The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. • The inside of the windshield is fogged. • The camera temperature gets too hot. • An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). • The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. • When tire chains are installed. uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator. 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * 3 WARNING Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash. When to use Use ACC only when traveling on open highways in good weather. The camera is located behind the rearview mirror. 3 WARNING ACC has limited braking capability. When your vehicle speed drops below 22 mph, ACC will automatically cancel and no longer will apply your vehicle’s brakes. Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal when conditions require. Driving The radar sensor is in the front grille. Important Reminder As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles. ■ Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~ ■ Shift positions for adaptive cruise control: In (D Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly impacted. * Not available on all models Continued 457 uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ■ How to activate the system 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * When the MAIN button is pressed, both ACC and the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are either turned on or off. How to use ACC (green) is on in the multi-information display. Adaptive cruise control is ready to use. ACC may not work properly under certain conditions. 2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 462 When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS). ■ Press the MAIN button on Driving the steering wheel. 458 * Not available on all models Do not use ACC under the following conditions: • On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in continuous stop and go traffic. • On roads with sharp turns. • On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed. • On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access. uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ■ To Set the Vehicle Speed 1To Set the Vehicle Speed –/SET Button You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the audio/information screen between mph and km/h. 2 Customized Features P. 318 On when adaptive cruise control begins Press and release Continued Driving Take your foot off the pedal and press down the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC begins. When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon, Set Vehicle Set Vehicle interval bars and set speed appear on the Speed Interval multi-information display. 459 uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ■ When in Operation 1When in Operation ■ There is a vehicle ahead ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following interval from the vehicle ahead. 2 To Set or Change Following Interval P. 465 If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, the beeper sounds, a message appears on the multi-information display. Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead. Beep ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m) Driving When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down. A vehicle icon appears on the multi-information display Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is short, ACC may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances: • The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle. • A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles. You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting. 2 Customized Features P. 318 460 uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ■ There is no vehicle ahead A vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the multiinformation display. 1When you depress the accelerator pedal Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal. If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it. While the accelerator pedal is depressed, the system does not apply the brakes to keep the following interval, as well as the BRAKE message on the multiinformation display does not appear. 2 When in Operation P. 460 ■ When you depress the accelerator pedal You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes the set speed or a sufficient speed to keep the following interval. Driving Continued 461 uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ■ ACC Conditions and Limitations The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions. 1ACC Conditions and Limitations The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM). 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * P. 494 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 ■ Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). ■ Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). ■ Vehicle conditions Driving 462 • The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. • An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). • The camera temperature gets too high. • The parking brake is applied. • When the radar sensor cover is dirty. • The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. • When tire chains are installed. * Not available on all models Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently). If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer: • The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock, embankment, etc. • You drive the vehicle where the water is deep. • Your vehicle has a frontal collision. You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ■ Detection limitations Continued Driving • A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. • The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is too short. • A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. • When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you at high speed. • The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle. • When there are animals in front of your vehicle. • When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you. • The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of you is significantly large. • An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. • Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. • When driving through a narrow iron bridge. • When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly. • When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape. • When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane. 463 uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed 1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the steering wheel. If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set following interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. To increase speed You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake pedals. To decrease speed Driving 464 • Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly. • If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly. uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ■ To Set or Change Following Interval Interval Button Press the (interval) button to change the ACC following interval. Each time you press the button, the following interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through extra long, long, middle, and short following interval. Determine the most appropriate following interval setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following interval requirements set by local regulation. Driving Continued 465 uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference. When the Set Speed is: Vehicle Interval Driving 466 50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h) Short 83 feet 25 meters 1.1 sec 100 feet 31 meters 1.1 sec Middle 110 feet 33 meters 1.5 sec 137 feet 42 meters 1.5 sec Long 154 feet 47 meters 2.1 sec 200 feet 61 meters 2.1 sec Extra Long 204 feet 62 meters 2.8 sec 265 feet 81 meters 2.8 sec uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ■ To Cancel MAIN Button CANCEL Button 1To Cancel To cancel ACC, do any of the following: • Press the CANCEL button. • Press the MAIN button. u The ACC indicator (green) goes off. • Depress the brake pedal. ■ Automatic cancellation Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed. 1Automatic cancellation Continued Even though adaptive cruise control has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then press the RES/+ button. Driving The beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display when ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to automatically cancel: • Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). • When the radar sensor inside the front grille gets dirty. • The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected. • An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. • Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods. • Abrupt steering wheel movement. • When the ABS, VSA®, or CMBSTM is activated. • When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on. • When you manually apply the parking brake. • When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle. • The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty. 467 uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ■ To Switch ACC to Cruise Control ACC ON Cruise Control ON Press and hold the (interval) button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the multi-information display for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise. To switch back to ACC, press and hold the button again for one second. ACC Mode Selected appears on the multi-information display for two seconds. ■ When to use Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~. Driving ■ To Set the Vehicle Speed Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. ■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). If you keep the RES/+ or –/SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set. 468 1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following interval from a vehicle ahead of you. uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) * ■ To Cancel To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: • Press the CANCEL button. • Press the MAIN button. • Depress the brake pedal. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off. 1To Cancel Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. You cannot set or resume in the following situations: • When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) • When the MAIN button is turned off. At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control canceled automatically. Driving 469 uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane. ■ Steering input assist The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines. ■ LKAS camera Monitors the lane lines ■ Tactile and visual alerts Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane. 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * Important Safety Reminders The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a substitute for your vehicle control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle. 2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages P. 101 Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the front windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes. Driving LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions. The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways. The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions: 2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 476 When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off. If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering. LKAS may not function as designed on while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves. You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 470 * Not available on all models uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * ■ Lane Keep Support Function 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane, when the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger. When the vehicle enters the warning area, LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well a warning display. Driving ■ Lane Departure Warning Function When the vehicle enters the warning area, lane departure warning is provided by steering wheel vibration and display. Warning Area Warning Area * Not available on all models Continued 471 uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * ■ When the System can be Used The system can be used when the following conditions are met. • The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and your vehicle is in the center of the lane. • The vehicle speed is between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). • You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. • The turn signals are off. • The brake pedal is not depressed. • The wipers are not in continuous operation. ■ How to activate the system MAIN Button 1. Press the MAIN button. u The ACC and LKAS indicators come on. The system is ready to use. Driving LKAS Button 472 * Not available on all models 2. Press the LKAS button. u Lane outlines appear on the multiinformation display. The system is activated. 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer. uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * 3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The dotted outer lines change to solid ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings. 1When the System can be Used The LKAS temporarily deactivates when it fails to detect lane lines. When the system detects the lines again, it comes back on automatically. Models with ACC is shown. ■ To cancel 1To cancel MAIN Button Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off. To cancel the LKAS: Press the MAIN or LKAS button. Driving The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle. LKAS Button Continued 473 uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * ■ The system operation is suspended if When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the MultiInformation Display change to contour lines, and the beeper sounds (if activated). Driving 474 you: • Set the wipers to continuous operation. u Turning the wipers off resumes the LKAS. • Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph (64 km/h) or less. u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS. • Depress the brake pedal. u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal. Models with automatic intermittent wipers • Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the wipers operate continuously. u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop or operate intermittently. uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * ■ The LKAS may automatically be suspended when: • • • • The system fails to detect lane lines. The steering wheel is quickly turned. You fail to steer the vehicle. The vehicle speed is over the posted speed limit, on a curve road. Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes. ■ The LKAS may automatically be canceled when: • The camera temperature gets too high. • The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty. • When driving through a sharp curve. • When driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h). • When the ABS or VSA® systems engage. Driving A beeper will sound if the LKAS is automatically canceled. Continued 475 uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * ■ LKAS Conditions and Limitations The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following: ■ Environmental conditions • • • • • • • • • Driving 476 Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the front windshield. uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * ■ Roadway conditions • Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). • Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. • Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings. • The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk). • The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. • The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. • The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. • Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. • When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines). • When driving on roads with double lines. • Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. • The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. • The inside of the windshield is fogged. • The camera temperature gets too hot. • An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). • The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. Driving ■ Vehicle conditions 477 uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes. ■ VSA® Operation When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic system. You will also see the indicator blink. Driving VSA® System Indicator 1Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified. When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety. The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function. 478 uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System ■ VSA® On and Off This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA® functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep. VSA® OFF Indicator button is pressed To restore VSA® functionality/features, press With the button pressed, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA® traction and stability enhancement becomes less effective. In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off. When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on. Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off. Driving When the The traction control stops fully functioning, allowing the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. The VSA® OFF indicator will also come on and a message on the multi-information display informs you that the mode is changed. Traction control mode can not be changed during Mud * or Sand * modes. If you are driving on mud or sand, Mud * or Sand * Intelligent Traction Management modes can also be used to free a stuck vehicle. On other road surfaces, change to Normal or Snow mode, then press and hold the (VSA® OFF) button. 1Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal. the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a beep. VSA® is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle. * Not available on all models 479 uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist Agile Handling Assist Lightly brakes each of the front and rear wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering. 1Agile Handling Assist The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety. When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate. You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal. Driving 480 uuWhen DrivinguIntelligent Variable Torque ManagementTM (i-VTM4TM) AWD System * Intelligent Variable Torque ManagementTM (i-VTM4TM) AWD System * The Intelligent Variable Torque Management System (i-VTM4) is a full time all wheel drive system that automatically controls and transfers varying amount of engine torque to all wheels independently according to the driving conditions. You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle. If the AWD light blinks while driving, it indicates the differential temperature is too high. If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to park, an idle the engine idle until the indicator goes out. If the indicator does not go out, take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. 1Intelligent Variable Torque ManagementTM (i-VTM4TM) AWD System * NOTICE Do not continuously spin the front tires of your vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can cause transmission or rear differential damage. The i-VTM4 system may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified. 2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 553 Driving * Not available on all models 481 uuWhen DrivinguTPMS with Tire Fill Assist TPMS with Tire Fill Assist Monitors the tire pressure while you are driving. If your vehicle’s tire pressure becomes significantly low, the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator comes on and a message appears on the multi-information display. 1TPMS with Tire Fill Assist Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator to come on. 2 If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks P. 590 Tire pressure checked and inflated in: • Warm weather can become under-inflated in colder weather. • Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer weather. The Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation. Driving The TPMS audibly and visually informs you of changes in tire pressure of the individual tire that you are adjusting using audible and visual indications. If a change in tire pressure has been significant, the system beeps and the hazard lights flash continuously for five seconds when the specified tire pressure is reached. Stop filling the tire. 482 uuWhen DrivinguTPMS with Tire Fill Assist ■ Tire Pressure Monitor 1Tire Pressure Monitor To select the tire pressure monitor, set the power mode to ON, and press the (information) button until you see the tire pressure screen. The pressure for each tire is displayed in psi. Tire Pressures Low is displayed when a tire has significantly low pressure. The specific tire is displayed on the screen. The pressure displayed on the multi-information display can be slightly different from the actual pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a significant difference between the two values, or if the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator and the message on the multi-information display do not go off after you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure, have the system checked by a dealer. Tire Pressure Monitor Problem may appear if you drive with the compact spare tire, or there is a problem with the TPMS. Driving 483 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale Driving when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. 484 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Driving When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. 485 uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information (BSI) System * Blind spot information (BSI) System * Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle, particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as “blind spots.” When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you change lanes. ■ How the system works The transmission is in (D . ● Your vehicle speed is between 20 mph (32 km/h) Radar Sensors: and 100 mph (160 km/h) underneath the Alert zone range rear bumper corners A: Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) B: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m) C: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m) 1Blind spot information (BSI) System * 3 WARNING Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death. Do not rely only on the blind spot information system when changing lanes. Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes. ● Alert Zone A Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, BSI has limitations. Over reliance on BSI may result in a collision. B Driving C The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the following situations may occur. • The BSI alert indicator may not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even without the Blind Spot Info Not Available multi-information display appearing. • The BSI alert indicator may come on even with the message appearing. The BSI alert indicator may not come on under the following conditions: • A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more than two seconds. • A vehicle is parked in a side lane. • The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h). • An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle. 486 * Not available on all models uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information (BSI) System * ■ When the system detects a vehicle BSI Alert Indicator: Located near the outside rearview mirror on both sides. 1Blind spot information (BSI) System * Comes On ■ Comes on when ● ● A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind to overtake you with a speed difference of no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your vehicle. You pass a vehicle with a speed difference of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h). ■ Blinks and the beeper sounds when You move the turn signal lever in the direction of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds three times. Blinks You can change the setting for BSI. 2 Customized Features P. 318 Turn the system off when towing a trailer. The system may not work properly for the following reasons: • The added mass tilts the vehicle and changes the radar coverage. • The trailer itself can be detected by the radar sensors, causing the BSI alert indicators to come on. BSI may be adversely affected when: • Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc,.) are detected. • An object that does not reflect radio waves well, lane. Driving such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone. • Driving on a curved road. • A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent • The system picks up external electrical interference. • The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. • The orientation of the sensors has been changed. • In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog). For proper BSI use: • Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. • Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind. • Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired, or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted. * Not available on all models 487 uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM * LaneWatchTM * LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas and allows you to check for vehicle, in addition to your visual check and use of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while driving. 1 The system activates when you: Move the turn signal lever to the passenger side. Press the LaneWatch button. Driving Press the LaneWatch button again. Audio/Information Screen * Not available on all models 3 WARNING Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death. Do not rely only on LaneWatch while driving. Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes. Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in a collision. The system deactivates when you: Pull the turn signal lever back. 488 2 The passenger side view display appears on the audio/information screen. 1LaneWatchTM * The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather, lighting (including headlights and low sun angle), ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading. Camera The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display of traffic to the side and rear under the following conditions: • Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered, changing the height of the vehicle. • Your tires are over or under inflated. • Your tires or wheels are of varied size or construction. uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM * ■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen. • Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when you operate the turn signal light lever. • Display Time after Turn Signal Off: Changes the remaining LaneWatch display time after you pull the turn signal lever back. • Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch monitor. • Display: Adjusts display settings. 2 Customized Features P. 318 ■ Reference Lines 2 1 The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique lens makes objects on the screen look slightly different from what they are. LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift lever is in (R . For proper LaneWatch operation: • The camera is located in the passenger side door mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris. • Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers of any kind. • Do not touch the camera lens. 1Reference Lines Three lines that appear on the screen can give an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on the screen are from your vehicle, respectively. If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates that it is close to your vehicle whereas an object near line 3 farther away. The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm the safety of a lane change before changing lanes. Driving 3 1LaneWatchTM * The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and 3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines on the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more heavily loaded. Consult a dealer if: • The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is severely impacted, resulting in changing the camera angle. • The LaneWatch display does not come on at all. * Not available on all models 489 Braking Brake System ■ Parking Brake 1Parking Brake Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking. To apply: Depress the parking brake pedal down with your foot. NOTICE Release the parking brake fully before driving. The rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive with the parking brake applied. If you start driving without fully releasing the parking brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release Parking Brake appears on the multi-information display. Always apply the parking brake when parking. To release: 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Depress the parking brake. Driving 490 uuBrakinguBrake System ■ Foot Brake Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard. 2 Brake Assist System P. 493 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 492 1Foot Brake Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times. If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc. Driving Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear. Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you. 491 uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ■ ABS Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you. The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading. You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as “stomp and steer.” ■ ABS operation Driving The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice. ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on: • Wet or snow covered roads. • Roads paved with stone. • Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc. When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops. 492 1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use an incorrect tire type and size. When the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking is not affected, there is a possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control during hard braking. In the following cases, your vehicle may need more stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS: • When driving on rough road surfaces, including when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow. • When tire chains are installed. The following may be observed with the ABS system: • Motor sounds coming from the engine compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while vehicle is accelerates. • Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when ABS activates. These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern. uuBrakinguBrake Assist System Brake Assist System Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking. ■ Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking. When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down. Driving 493 uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable. ■ How the system works When to use The camera is located behind the rearview mirror. 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * Important Safety Reminder The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions. The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions: 2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 498 You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 Driving 1How the system works The radar sensor is in the front grille. The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you. The CMBSTM activates when: ● The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision. ● Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you. 494 * Not available on all models Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you when the your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph (30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle detected in front of you. When CMBS activates, it may automatically apply the brakes. CMBS cancels when your vehicle stops, or a potential collision is no longer determined. uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * ■ When the system activates 1When the system activates The system provides visual, audible and Tactile alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.) Visual Alerts The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list. 2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 498 Beep Tactile Alert At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/ Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through the audio/ information screen’s customized features. Driving Audible Alert ■ Vibration alert on the steering wheel When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and audible alerts. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the steering wheel, etc.). Continued 495 uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * ■ Collision Alert Stages The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage. CMBSTM Distance between vehicles Stage one Normal Long Short Vehicle Ahead Your Vehicle Driving Stage two Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead The sensors detect a vehicle Audible & Visual WARNINGS When in Long, visual and audible alerts come on at a There is a risk of a collision longer distance from a vehicle with the vehicle ahead of ahead than in Normal setting, you. and in Short, at a shorter distance than in Normal. The risk of a collision has increased, time to respond is reduced. Steering Wheel In case of an oncoming vehicle detected, rapid vibration is provided. Braking — — Lightly applied — Forcefully applied Visual and audible alerts. Stage three 496 Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead The CMBS determines that a collision is unavoidable. TM uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * ■ CMBSTM On and Off 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * Press this button until the beeper sounds to switch the system on or off. The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain conditions: 2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 498 When the CMBSTM is off: • The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument panel comes on. • A message on the multi-information display reminds you that the system is off. The CMBSTM is in the previously selected ON or OFF setting each time you start the engine. Driving * Not available on all models Continued 497 uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * ■ CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions. 2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 450 ■ Environmental conditions Driving • • • • • • • • Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between objects and the background. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians. Reflections on the interior of the front windshield. ■ Roadway conditions • Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). • The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. • Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads. 498 * Not available on all models uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * ■ Vehicle conditions • • • • • • • • • Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). When tire chains are installed. The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. The camera temperature gets too hot. Driving with the parking brake applied. When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty. Driving Continued 499 uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * ■ Detection limitations Driving 500 • A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. • The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is too short. • A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. • When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you at high speed. • The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small vehicle. • When there are animals in front of your vehicle. • When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. • The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of you is significantly large. • An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. • Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc. • Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. • When driving through a narrow iron bridge. • When a pedestrian blends in with the background. • When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands or raised or they are running. • When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group. • When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down. • When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size). uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * ■ Automatic shutoff CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the CMBSTM indicator comes and stays on when: • The temperature inside the system is high. • You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period. • An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.). • The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty. Once the conditions that caused CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on. Driving Continued 501 uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * ■ With Little Chance of a Collision The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are: ■ When Passing Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass. ■ At an intersection Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn. ■ On a curve When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you. Driving ■ Through a low bridge at high speed You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed. ■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc. You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls. 502 * Not available on all models 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) * For the CMBSTM to work properly: Always keep the radar sensor cover clean. Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent. Do not paint, or apply any coverings or paint to radar sensor area. This can impact CMBS operation. If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the CMBSTM off button and take your vehicle to a dealer. Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P . 4. Turn off the engine. 1Parking Your Vehicle 3 WARNING The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged. Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline. A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death. Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift lever position Indicator. 1When Stopped Driving Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire. NOTICE The following can damage the transmission: • Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. • Changing into (P before the vehicle stops completely. When facing uphill, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire inside the vehicle. 503 uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System * Parking Sensor System * The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles near your vehicle. The beeper and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle. ■ The sensor location and range Front Corner Sensors Rear Corner Sensors Rear Center Sensors 1Parking Sensor System * Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking. The system may not work properly when: • The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or dirt, etc. • The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass, bumpy road, or a hill. • The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather. • The system is affected by devices that emit ultrasonic waves. • Driving in bad weather. The system may not sense: Driving 504 • Thin or low objects. • Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton, or sponge. Front: Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less Rear: Within about 32 in (80 cm) or less * Not available on all models Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less • Objects directly under the bumper. Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors. uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System * ■ Parking sensor system on and off Indicator With the power mode in ON, press the parking sensor system button to turn on or off the system. The indicator in the button comes on when the system is on. The rear center and corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in (R , and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). The front corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the shift lever is not in (P , and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). Driving Continued 505 uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System * ■ When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes shorter Length of the intermittent beep Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle Indicator Corner Sensors Center Sensors Moderate — Rear: About 43-32 in (110-80 cm) Short Front: About 24-18 in (60-45 cm) Rear: About 32-22 in (80-55 cm) Rear: About 32-22 in (80-55 cm) Very short Front: About 18-14 in (45-35 cm) Rear: About 22-18 in (55-45 cm) Rear: About 22-18 in (55-45 cm) Front: About 14 in (35 cm) or less Rear: About 18 in (45 cm) or less Rear: About 18 in (45 cm) or less Audio/information screen Blinks in Yellow*1 Blinks in Amber Driving Continuous *1: At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles. 506 Indicators light where the sensor detects an obstacle Blinks in Red uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System * ■ Turning off All Rear Sensors 1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). 2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON. 3. Keep pressing the button for 10 seconds. Release the button when the indicator in the button flashes. 4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off. u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off. 1Turning off All Rear Sensors When you shift to (R , the indicator in the parking sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off. To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds three times when the rear sensors come back on. Driving 507 uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor * Cross Traffic Monitor * Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected. The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space. 1Cross Traffic Monitor * 3 CAUTION Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not detect an approaching vehicle at all. Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing so may result in a collision. Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing. Driving 508 * Not available on all models uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor * ■ How the System Works 1Cross Traffic Monitor * The system activates when: • The power mode is in ON. • The Cross Traffic Monitor system is turned on. 2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 511 • The shift lever is in (R . • Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or lower. Radar sensors: Underneath the rear bumper corners The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly behind your vehicle. The system does not detect or provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may not detect or alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects. * Not available on all models Continued Driving When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning. Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect an approaching vehicle, or may delay alerting you under the following conditions: • A vehicle, which is parked adjacent to your vehicle, is blocking the radar sensor’s view. • Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph (5 km/h) or higher. • A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than between about 6 and 16 mph (10 and 25 km/h). • The system picks up external interference such as other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby. • Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with snow, ice, mud or dirt. • When there is bad weather. • Your vehicle is on an incline. • Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear. • The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. Have a vehicle checked by a dealer. For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind. 509 uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor * ■ When the System Detects a Vehicle 1When the System Detects a Vehicle If the on the lower right changes to when the shift lever is in (R , mud snow or ice may have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. Check the bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean the area if necessary. Arrow Icon Wide View Normal View Top Down View An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information screen. Driving 510 If the comes on when the transmission is in (R , there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer. uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor * ■ Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off You can switch on and off the system using the audio/information screen. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Camera. 4. Select Cross Traffic Monitor. 5. Select On or Off, then select OK. The system can also be turned on and off on the audio/information screen by pressing the CTM icon. Driving CTM icon 511 Multi-View Rear Camera About Your Multi-View Rear Camera The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display automatically changes to a rear view when the transmission is put into (R . ■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area Wide View Mode Approx. 39 inches (1 m) Approx. 20 inches (50 cm) Guidelines Normal View Mode The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are. Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle. If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris. Models with color audio system Driving Camera Top Down View Mode Bumper Models with color audio system You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the selector knob to switch the angle. Models with Display Audio You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Touch the appropriate icon to switch the angle. : Wide view : Normal view : Top down view 512 1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera You can change the Camera Guideline On or Off settings. 2 Customized Features P. 318 Models with Display Audio You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings. 2 Customized Features P. 318 Fixed Guideline On: Guidelines appear when you change the shift to (R . Off: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. Off: Guidelines do not move. uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera Models with color audio system • If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R . • If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the engine, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into (R . • If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of (R , Wide view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R . Models with Display Audio Driving • If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R . • If you were using Top down view mode before turning off the engine, the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into (R , the view mode you were using just before using Top down view mode (Wide view mode or Normal view mode) will be activated. • If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of (R , the view mode you were using just before selecting Top down view mode (Wide view mode or Normal view mode) will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R . 513 Refueling Fuel Information ■ Fuel recommendation Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher Use of lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance. Use of gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage. ■ Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines. Driving Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system. For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. ■ Fuel tank capacity: 19.5 US gal (73.8 L) 514 1Fuel Information NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available. Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline. uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel How to Refuel Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler nozzle. 1. Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the Press rear. 2. Turn off the engine. 3. Press the fuel fill door release button. u The fuel fill door opens. 1How to Refuel 3 WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel. • Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. • Handle fuel only outdoors. • Wipe up spills immediately. NOTICE Driving The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening. The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature. Continued 515 uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel 4. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully. u Make sure that the end of the filler nozzle goes down along with the filler pipe. u Keep the filler nozzle level. u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically. u After filling, wait about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle. 5. Shut the fuel fill door by hand. Driving 516 1How to Refuel If the fuel filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer. Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity. If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle. 2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container P. 598 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle. ■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving. Miles driven Gallons of fuel Miles per Gallon 100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/ Driving You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the multi-information display. • Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal. • Maintain the specified tire pressure. • Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. • Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight and increases wind resistance. 1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions 517 518 Maintenance This chapter discusses basic maintenance. Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 520 Safety When Performing Maintenance ...521 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 522 Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 523 Maintenance Under the Hood Maintenance Items Under the Hood....527 Opening the Hood ........................... 528 Engine Compartment Cover............. 529 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 530 Oil Check ......................................... 531 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 532 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter...533 * Not available on all models Engine Coolant ................................ 535 Transmission Fluid............................ 537 Brake Fluid....................................... 538 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 538 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 539 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades .......................................... 545 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 547 Tire and Loading Information Label ... 548 Tire Labeling .................................... 548 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).... 550 Wear Indicators................................ 552 Tire Service Life................................ 552 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 553 Tire Rotation.................................... 554 Winter Tires ..................................... 555 Battery............................................... 556 Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Button Battery ........... 557 Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance.............558 Cleaning Interior Care .................................... 559 Exterior Care.................................... 561 Accessories and Modifications ........ 565 519 Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.) ■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance ■ Daily inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling. ■ Periodic inspections • Check the automatic transmission fluid level monthly. 2 Automatic Transmission Fluid P. 537 • Check the brake fluid level monthly. 2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 538 • Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. Maintenance 520 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 547 1Inspection and Maintenance U.S. models Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are “certified” to EPA standards. According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the multi-information display. 2 Maintenance Service Items P. 525 If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com. 2 Authorized Manuals P. 611 • Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 539 • Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. 2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 545 If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet. uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance Safety When Performing Maintenance Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task. ■ Maintenance Safety • To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts. • Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire. • To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline. • Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air. • Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation. • The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off. • Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts. • Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts. 3 WARNING Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner’s manual. 3 WARNING Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual. Maintenance ■ Vehicle Safety 1Safety When Performing Maintenance 521 uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles. Maintenance 522 1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts. Maintenance MinderTM Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the multi-information display. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time. To Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information 1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the (Information) button until the engine oil life appears on the multi-information display. Remaining Engine Oil Life Maintenance Service Items Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0 Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 to 91 90 to 81 80 to 71 70 to 61 60 to 51 50 to 41 40 to 31 30 to 21 20 to 16 15 to 11 10 to 6 5 to 1 0 Maintenance Press the (Information) button Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage. There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the multi-information display. 2 Maintenance Service Items P. 525 Continued 523 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information Display Maintenance Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Maintenance Due Soon 15% The remaining engine oil life is 15 to The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life, and the maintenance 6 percent. Once you switch the items should be inspected and serviced display by pressing the soon. (Information) button, this message will go off. Maintenance Due Now 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the percent. Pressing the maintenance items should be inspected (Information) button to switch to and serviced as soon as possible. another display. Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance U.S. The system message indicator ( 524 Canada Explanation Information The remaining engine oil life has The engine oil life has passed. passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately. distance appears after driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km (Canadian models). Pressing the (Information) button to switch to another display. ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message. uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Maintenance Service Items System Message Indicator 1Maintenance Service Items • Independent of the maintenance message in the Main Item CODE A B ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Sub Items Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil*1 Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system# Inspect fuel lines and connections# *1: If the message Maintenance Due Now does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. # : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 609. *2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). * Not available on all models CODE 1 2 ● ● ● ● 3 4 ● ● ● ● 5 6 ● ● Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element*2 Replace dust and pollen filter*3 Inspect drive belt Replace transmission fluid and transfer fluid * Replace spark plugs Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4 Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace rear differential fluid *, *5 Maintenance ● multi-information display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years. • Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy. Maintenance Minder Message *4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures (under -20°F, -29°C), or towing a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.) / 100,000 km (Canada). *5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (Shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). Continued 525 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Resetting the Display 1Resetting the Display NOTICE Models with color audio system Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service. Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems. The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the engine oil life display yourself. Models with Display Audio RESET button Press the (Information) button Maintenance 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Go to the Maintenance Info. group. 2 Customized Features P. 318 3. Press and hold the RESET button u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display. 4. Select Reset with the (Information) button, then push the RESET button. u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display returns to 100%. u To cancel the oil life reset mode, select Cancel, then push the RESET button. 526 You can reset the engine oil life display using the audio/information screen. 2 Customized Features P. 318 Maintenance Under the Hood Maintenance Items Under the Hood Engine Oil Fill Cap Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange) Brake Fluid (Black Cap) Washer Fluid Battery Maintenance Engine Coolant Reserve Tank Radiator Cap Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick 527 uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood Opening the Hood 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake. 2. Pull the hood release handle under the lower left corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly. Hood Release Handle Pull 1Opening the Hood NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised: The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage either the hood or the wipers. When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched. 3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center of the hood to release the lock mechanism, and open the hood. Lever Maintenance Support Rod Grip Clamp 528 4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood. When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close. If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated. uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Cover Engine Compartment Cover The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by a cover. You may need to remove the cover when you perform certain maintenance work. Pull up on the engine compartment cover, remove it from the pins. Engine Compartment Cover Maintenance 529 uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil Recommended Engine Oil • Genuine Honda Motor Oil • Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the container. Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged. This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements. Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for the ambient temperature as shown. Maintenance Ambient Temperature ■ Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade. 530 1Recommended Engine Oil Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability. uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check Oil Check We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground. Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil. 1. Remove the dipstick (orange). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its hole. 1Oil Check If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill. 4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary. Maintenance Upper Mark Lower Mark 531 uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil Adding Engine Oil 1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine oil dipstick. Engine Oil Fill Cap Maintenance 532 1Adding Engine Oil NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and engine damage. If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components. uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly. Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the multiinformation display. 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the Drain Bolt engine off. 2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap. 3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the Washer oil into a suitable container. 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground. Maintenance Continued 533 uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter Oil Filter Maintenance 534 4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil. 5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it. 6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the oil filter base, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the oil filter rubber seal. 7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque: 29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m) 8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 5.7 US qt (5.4 L) 9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine. 10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter. 11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil. 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer. When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work. uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant Engine Coolant 1Engine Coolant Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water. We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly. ■ Reserve Tank 1. Remove the engine compartment cover. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 529 MAX 2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank. 3. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. 4. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Continued If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible. Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components. Maintenance MIN NOTICE Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details. 535 uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant ■ Radiator Radiator Cap 1Radiator 1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool. 2. Remove the engine compartment cover. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 529 3. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system. Do not push the cap down when turning. 4. Push down and turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to remove it. 5. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low. 6. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully. 7. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back on the reserve tank. Maintenance 536 3 WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap. NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment. uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid Transmission Fluid ■ Automatic Transmission Fluid Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid) Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary. Do not attempt to check or change the automatic transmission fluid yourself. 1Automatic Transmission Fluid NOTICE Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid) with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty. Maintenance 537 uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid Brake Fluid Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 NOTICE ■ Checking the Brake Fluid The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reserve tank. Brake Reservoir MAX Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive damage. If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement. Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible. MIN Refilling Window Washer Fluid Models without washer level sensor Maintenance Check the amount of window washer fluid. If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir. If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible. 1Refilling Window Washer Fluid NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Models with washer level sensor If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the multi-information display. Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir. 538 1Brake Fluid Replacing Light Bulbs Headlight Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. High beam headlight: Low beam headlight: 1Headlight Bulbs 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type) Models with Auto high-beam system LED type Models without Auto high-beam system 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type) The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician. ■ High Beam Headlight Clips NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter. Driver side 1. Remove the engine compartment cover. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 529 2. Remove the clips. 3. Remove the air intake duct. When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth. Maintenance Continued 539 uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs Both sides Bulb Tab Coupler 4. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 5. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to remove. 6. Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise. 7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb. 1Headlight Bulbs Remove clip using phillips head screwdriver. Center pin Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push until it is flat. Push until the pin is flat. Maintenance 540 uuReplacing Light BulbsuDaytime Running Lights and Parking Lights ■ Low Beam Headlights 1Low Beam Headlights Models with Auto high-beam Models without Auto high-beam Bulb Tab Coupler 1. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 2. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to remove. 3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise. 4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb. Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Daytime Running Lights and Parking Lights Models with LED type daytime running lights Daytime running lights and parking lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. 2 Headlight Bulbs P. 539 Parking light bulbs and front turn signal bulbs are the same. 2 Front Turn Signal/Parking * and Fog * Light Bulbs P. 542 Maintenance Models without LED type daytime running lights Daytime running light bulbs and high beam headlight bulbs are the same. Front Side Marker Lights Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. * Not available on all models 541 uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking * and Fog * Light Bulbs Front Turn Signal/Parking * and Fog * Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. Front Turn Signal/Parking Light: Fog Light *: * 28/8W (Amber) 35 W (H8 for halogen bulb type) 1Front Turn Signal/Parking * and Fog * Light Bulbs Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center pin to remove the clip. 1. Remove the clip using a flat-tip screwdriver, remove the bolt, and push up the under cover. Clip Bolt Models with fog light 2. Remove the coupler Coupler Maintenance Bulb Bulb Socket All models 3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. 4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb. Tab Side Turn Signal */Emergency Indicator Lights * Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. 542 * Not available on all models Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push until it is flat. Push until the pin is flat. uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear Turn Signal and Back-Up Light Bulbs Rear Turn Signal and Back-Up Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. Back-Up Light: Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W 21 W Screws Bulb Socket 3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. Remove the old bulb. 4. Insert a new bulb and turn clockwise. 5. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on the body. 6. Align the pins with the body grommets, then push in until they fully seat. Socket Maintenance Bulb 1. Use a Phillip-head screwdriver to remove the screws. 2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar. Brake/Taillight and Rear Side Marker Lights Brake/taillight and rear side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. 543 uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Lights Rear License Plate Lights When replacing, use the following bulbs. Rear License Plate Lights: 5W 1. Remove the license plate light assembly by pulling it towards you, and then pulling the front edge upward. 2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. Remove the old bulb. 3. Insert a new bulb and turn clockwise. Maintenance Bulb Socket High-Mount Brake Light High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. 544 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades Checking Wiper Blades If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass. Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the passenger side. 1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the windshield. Maintenance 2. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, pry up on the edge of the lock tab to release it. Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches. Slide the blade off of the wiper arm. Lock Tab Continued 545 uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber 3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by pulling the tabbed end out. Wiper Blade Wiper Blade 4. Remove the retainers from the wiper blade that has been removed, and mount to a new wiper blade. u Correctly align the wiper blade protrusion and the retainer grooves. Retainer Maintenance 546 5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end. u The tab on the holder should fit in the indent of the wiper blade. 6. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm, then push down the lock tab. 7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first, then the driver side. Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated. ■ Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating. Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly. Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge. ■ Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: • Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. • Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. • Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. • Excessive tread wear. 2 Wear Indicators P. 552 • Cracks or other damage around valve stem. 3 WARNING Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance. Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached. If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold. Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS. 2 TPMS with Tire Fill Assist P. 482 Maintenance At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa, 0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month. 1Checking Tires Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced. Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before long trips. 547 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label Tire and Loading Information Label The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information. Label Example 1Tire and Loading Information Label The tire and loading information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and spare. Tire Labeling Example Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN) The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below. Maintenance Maximum Tire Load Maximum Tire Pressure Tire Size ■ Tire Sizes Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. 548 1Tire Sizes Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. P235/60R18 102V P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). 235: Tire width in millimeters. 60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 18: Rim diameter in inches. 102: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating). uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling ■ Tire Identification Number (TIN) The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire. ■ Glossary of Tire Terminology DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture. Year Week Maintenance Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread. 1Tire Identification Number (TIN) 549 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings. ■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Maintenance 550 ■ Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. 1Uniform Tire Quality Grading For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) ■ Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 1Traction ■ Temperature The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 1Temperature Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Maintenance 551 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators Wear Indicators Example of a Wear Indicator mark The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads. Tire Service Life The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use). Maintenance 552 In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear. uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement Tire and Wheel Replacement Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the Vehicle Stability Assist® (VSA®), hill start assist, and the all-wheel drive (AWD) * systems as well as ABS to work incorrectly. It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs. If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle. 1Tire and Wheel Replacement 3 WARNING Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual. Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. Maintenance * Not available on all models 553 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation Tire Rotation Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the multi-information display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life. ■ Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here. Front 1Tire Rotation Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below. Front Rotation Mark ■ Tires with rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here. Maintenance 554 Front Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate TPMS. 2 TPMS with Tire Fill Assist P. 482 uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWinter Tires Winter Tires If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked “M+S” tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving. Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding. 1Winter Tires 3 WARNING Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed. Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law. When mounting, refer to the following points. For winter tires: • Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. • Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: • Install them on the front tires only. • Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the chains listed below: • Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can. • Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. • Drive slowly. NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle. When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle operational limits. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer. Maintenance Cable-type: SCC Super Z LT-ZT735 Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains. 555 Battery Checking the Battery The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the multi-information display will display a warning message. If this happens, have you vehicle inspected by a dealer. 1Battery 3 WARNING The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation. Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly. If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead: • The audio system is disabled. 2 Audio System Theft Protection P. 204 Models without navigation system • The clock resets. 2 Clock P. 110 Charging the Battery Maintenance 556 Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system. Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last. A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you. When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it. WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. If you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion. Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Button Battery If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery. 3 WARNING ■ Smart Entry Remote Battery type: CR2032 1. Remove the built-in key. Battery 1Replacing the Button Battery NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer. Maintenance 2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the buttons. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent scratching the smart entry remote. 3. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity. CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children. If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately. 557 Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance Air Conditioning To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842. 1Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance NOTICE Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed. Air Conditioner label is found under the hood: 2 Safety Labels P. 71 2 Specifications P. 602 Canadian models : Caution Maintenance : Flammable Refrigerant Dust and Pollen Filter The heating and cooling system */climate control system * is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter. We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust. 558 : Requires Registered Technician to Service * Not available on all models : Air Conditioning System 1Dust and Pollen Filter If the airflow from the heating and cooling system */ climate control system * deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement. Cleaning Interior Care Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue. ■ Cleaning Seat Belts Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth. Opening 1Interior Care Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them. Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer. Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline. ■ Cleaning the Window 1Cleaning the Window Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them. Wipe using a glass cleaner. Continued Maintenance After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing. 559 uuCleaninguInterior Care ■ Floor Mats Unlock Lock 1Floor Mats The front and rear seat floor mats hook over the floor anchors, which keep mats them from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats. ■ Maintaining Genuine Leather * Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and 10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately. Maintenance 560 * Not available on all models If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mat properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions. uuCleaninguExterior Care Exterior Care Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it. ■ Washing the Vehicle 1Washing the Vehicle Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: • If driving on roads with road salt. • If driving in coastal areas. • If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces. Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine compartment. It can cause a malfunction. ■ Washing the Trunk Drain plug Use a water and mild detergent solution, and a soft brush or cloth to clean the inside of the trunk. Continued Do not spray water on to the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel system or engine. Maintenance To drain water from the trunk, remove the drain plug by turning it counter-clockwise. u When you are finished washing the trunk, dry it with a soft cloth, and reinstall the drain plug. Air Intake Vents 561 uuCleaninguExterior Care ■ Using an Automated Car Wash • Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash. • Fold in the door mirrors. • Automatic intermittent wipers * equipment vehicles, wipers switch to OFF. ■ Using High Pressure Cleaners • Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. • Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to enter the vehicle interior. • Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead, use low pressure water and a mild detergent. ■ Applying Wax A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary. Maintenance 562 * Not available on all models 1Applying Wax NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately. uuCleaninguExterior Care ■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water. 1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin. ■ Cleaning the Window Wipe using a glass cleaner. ■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly. Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that help keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing. Maintenance Continued 563 uuCleaninguExterior Care ■ Fogged Exterior Light Lenses The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights. Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction. However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Maintenance 564 Accessories and Modifications Accessories When installing accessories, check the following: • Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and delay your reaction to driving conditions. • Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy. • Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle. 2 Fuses P. 591 • Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation. • Your vehicle should not be used to carry a slide-in camper. If you install a truck cap, be sure it is properly installed and does not exceed your vehicle’s load limits. 1Accessories and Modifications 3 WARNING Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and modifications. Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415 Maintenance 565 uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications Modifications Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect. Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations. The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems. Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components. Maintenance 566 Handling the Unexpected This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles. Tools Types of Tools .................................. 568 If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 569 Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine ........................ 578 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak..........................................579 Emergency Engine Stop ................... 580 Jump Starting.................................... 581 Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 584 Overheating How to Handle Overheating............. 585 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On ............................................. 587 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ................................................. 587 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ................................... 588 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On ....................................................589 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On ........................... 589 If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks........................................590 Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 591 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 595 Emergency Towing........................... 596 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door................................................. 597 Refueling Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container ...................................598 567 Tools Types of Tools 1Types of Tools The tools are stored in the trunk. Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle Jack Handle Bar Handling the Unexpected 568 Jack Trunk Funnel If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced. 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever to (P . 3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). 1Changing a Flat Tire Follow compact spare precautions: Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2) When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible. Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire. Handling the Unexpected The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle. Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire, as it can damage the tire pressure sensor. Continued 569 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire Tire Tray Holding Bolts 1. Open the trunk. 2. Remove the two tire tray holding bolts. Tire Tray Handling the Unexpected 3. Pull out the tire tray with the handles, and hook the rear of the tire tray to the guides on the back edge of the trunk. Handles 4. Loosen the strap, then take the jack out. Jack 570 Strap 1Changing a Flat Tire NOTICE Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service. uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire Wing Bolt 5. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the tool box and the spacer cone. Then, remove the compact spare tire. Tool Box Spacer Cone Wheel Blocks The tire to be replaced. 7. Place the compact spare tire, wheel side up under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced. Continued Handling the Unexpected 6. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire. 571 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire 8. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench. Handling the Unexpected 572 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ How to Set Up the Jack Jacking Points 1How to Set Up the Jack 1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed. 3 WARNING The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath. Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. 3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground. Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or their shape may not match. The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely: • Do not use while the engine is running. • Use only where the ground is firm and level. • Use only at the jacking points. • Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. • Do not put anything on top of or underneath the jack. Handling the Unexpected 2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch. Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle. Jack Handle Bar Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle Continued 573 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ Replacing the Flat Tire 1Replacing the Flat Tire 1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire. Handling the Unexpected 2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth. 3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating. 5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 94 lbf∙ft (127 N∙m, 13 kgf∙m) 574 Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe. uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ Securing the Flat Tire on the Pickup Bed Cap 1Securing the Flat Tire on the Pickup Bed 1. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the cap as shown in the image, and remove the cap. 2. Remove the center cap and place the tire on the pickup bed. 3 WARNING Loose items can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash and could seriously injure the occupants. Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving. Wing Bolt Handling the Unexpected Spacer Cone 3. Place the spacer cone onto the wheel hub, then secure the flat tire to the pickup bed with the wing bolt as shown. 4. Securely store the jack on the tire tray using the strap. 5. Release the tire tray and slide it back in place. 6. Tighten the tire tray holding bolts securely. 7. Store the center cap and the tool box in the trunk. u Make sure it does not get scratched or damaged. If you remove the tire from the pickup bed, reinstall the cap to its original location. Continued 575 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ Securing a Compact Spare Tire on the Pickup Bed As a temporary mounting location, you may secure the compact spare tire on the pickup bed, if needed. 1. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flatCap tip screwdriver. Put it into the cap as shown in the image, and remove the cap. 2. Remove the compact spare tire from the tire tray. 2 Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire P. 570 Handling the Unexpected 3. Place the compact spare tire on the pickup bed as shown. 4. Place the spacer cone on the wheel hub and the spacer washer within the spacer cone. Then secure the compact spare tire to the pickup bed with the wing bolt as shown. 5. Store or secure the tool box. Spacer Cone Wing Bolt Spacer Washer 576 If you remove the compact spare tire from the pickup bed, reinstall the cap to its original location. 1Securing a Compact Spare Tire on the Pickup Bed The spacer washer is stored in the tool box. uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ TPMS with Tire Fill Assist and the Compact Spare Tire If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressure Monitor Problem appears on the multi-information display, but this is normal. If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the warning message on the multi-information display and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers). 1TPMS with Tire Fill Assist and the Compact Spare Tire The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure that it is correct. Use the TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. Handling the Unexpected 577 Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine If the engine does not start, check the starter. 1Checking the Engine If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle to jump start it. 2 Jump Starting P. 581 Handling the Unexpected Starter condition Starter doesn’t turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly. Checklist Check for a message on the multi-information display. ● If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 579 uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range. 2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 142 Check the brightness of the interior lights. Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness. ● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all 2 Battery P. 556 If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 591 Review the engine start procedure. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 434 Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started. ● The starter turns over normally but the engine doesn’t start. There may be a problem with the fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly. 2 Immobilizer System P. 133 Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 103 Check the fuse. Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 595 If the problem continues: 2 Emergency Towing P. 596 578 uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak 2. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds and the ENGINE START/STOP button changes from flashing to on. u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode will change to ACCESSORY. Handling the Unexpected If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the multi-information display, the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows. 1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the smart entry remote while the ENGINE START/ STOP button is flashing. The buttons on the smart entry remote should be facing you. u The ENGINE START/STOP button flashes for about 30 seconds. 579 uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop Emergency Engine Stop The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations: • Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds. • Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times. Handling the Unexpected 580 The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place. The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped. To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Canadian models Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal. 1Emergency Engine Stop Do not press the button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched off. Jump Starting ■ Jump Starting Procedure 1Jump Starting Booster Battery 3. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. u When using an automotive battery charger to boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower charging voltage than 15 volts. Check the charger manual for the proper setting. 4. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal. Continued 3 WARNING A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby. Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery. Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables. Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting. Handling the Unexpected Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood. 1. Pull up on the engine cover, remove it from Pins the pins. u Start on the passenger side and lift the outermost edge of the cover. u Move towards the driver side while applying uniform upward pressure. 2. Connect the first jumper cable to your Engine Cover vehicle’s battery + terminal. 581 uuJump Startingu 5. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the engine hanger as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part. 6. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine and increase its rpm slightly. 7. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact. Handling the Unexpected 582 uuJump Startingu ■ What to Do After the Engine Starts Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order. 1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery + terminal. Handling the Unexpected Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer. 583 Shift Lever Does Not Move Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position. ■ Releasing the Lock Cover Handling the Unexpected Release Button Shift Lock Release Slot 584 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote. 3. Open the lid of the console compartment. 4. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock release slot as shown in the image, and remove the cover. 5. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot. 6. While pushing the key down, press the shift lever release button and place the shift lever into (N . u The lock is now released. Have the shift lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible. Overheating How to Handle Overheating Overheating symptoms are as follows: • The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses power. • Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment. ■ First thing to do Continued 3 WARNING Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. NOTICE Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge needle at the H mark may damage the engine. Handling the Unexpected 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides. Then, open the hood. 1How to Handle Overheating 585 uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating ■ Next thing to do MIN MAX Reserve Tank 1How to Handle Overheating Handling the Unexpected 1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the temperature gauge needle goes down. u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately stop the engine. 2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, remove the engine compartment cover then add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 529 u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on. ■ Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge. If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down, contact a dealer for repairs. 586 3 WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap. If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs. Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible. Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. ■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on 1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on. ■ What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minutes. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary. 1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. 2 Oil Check P. 531 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Turn off the climate control system */heating and cooling system *, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs. * Not available on all models 1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery. Handling the Unexpected 3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The indicator goes off: Start driving again. u The indicator does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs immediately. 587 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink Handling the Unexpected 588 • Comes on if there is a problem with the engine emissions control system. • Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. ■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. ■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools. 1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged. If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected. uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On U.S. Canada ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on • The brake fluid is low. • There is a malfunction in the brake system. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. • If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. • If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking. ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on • Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system. • If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears. If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately. If both red and amber brake system indicators come on, stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer immediately. Handling the Unexpected If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On 1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On 589 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink Handling the Unexpected 590 The pressure of one or more tires is significantly low, or TPMS with Tire Fill Assist has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with TPMS with Tire Fill Assist or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb. ■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers). 1If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level. TPMS with Tire Fill Assist provides visual and audible assistance during tire pressure adjustment. With the power mode in ON, while you adjust tire pressure up or down, the system alerts you as follows: Below recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and exterior lights flash once every five seconds. At recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and exterior lights flash rapidly for five seconds. Above recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and lights flash twice every three seconds. Fuses Fuse Locations If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown. ■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type A Tab Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number. Located near the passenger’s side damper house. Push the tabs to open the box. Handling the Unexpected Continued 591 uuFusesuFuse Locations ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating 1 Handling the Unexpected 2 Circuit Protected − AC INVERTER RR BLOWER − VSA MTR VSA FSR MAIN FAN − MAIN FUSE SUB FAN WIP MTR WASHER − − FR BLOWER AUDIO AMP RR DEF − − − RR DEF − Amps (70 A)*1 70 A*2 30 A*1 (30 A)*2 40 A 20 A 30 A*1 (30 A)*2 150 A 30 A 30 A 20 A (20 A) (30 A) 40 A (30 A) 30 A*1 (30 A)*2 (40 A) (30 A)*1 30 A*2 (20 A) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 592 Circuit Protected − RR BLOWER − − − − − MAIN FAN SMALL STOP − STOP SMALL − L H/L LO IGPS − R H/L LO L H/L LO IGPS R H/L LO INJECTOR IG COIL H/L LO MAIN DBW USB Amps −*1 30 A*2 −*1 (30 A)*2 −*1 (30 A)*2 −*1 30 A*2 10 A*1 10 A*2 − 10 A*1 10 A*2 − 10 A*1 7.5 A*2 − 10 A*1 10 A*2 7.5 A*1 10 A*2 20 A*1 15 A*2 20 A*1 15 A*2 (15 A) 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Circuit Protected FR FOG BACK UP HAZARD MAIN RLY AS P/SEAT (REC) AS P/SEAT (SLI) ACM MG CLUTCH MAIN RLY HAZARD FI SUB IG COIL INJECTOR DBW H/L LO MAIN SMALL/STOP MAIN BACK UP FR FOG H/STEERING WHEEL HORN RADIO Amps (15 A)*1 10 A*2 15 A*1 15 A*2 (20 A) (20 A) 20 A 7.5 A 15 A*1 15 A*2 15 A 15 A*1 20 A*2 15 A*1 20 A*2 20 A 10 A*1 15 A*2 (10 A) 10 A 20 A *1:Models without the AC power outlet *2:Models with the AC power outlet uuFusesuFuse Locations ■ Engine Compartment Fuse ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating Box Type B Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number. Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Amps 40 A (20 A) 30 A 30 A − 60 A 60 A 60 A − (20 A) 7.5 A 20 A (7.5 A) (7.5 A) 20 A (20 A) 10 A (20 A) − − − (15 A) (20 A) 7.5 A Handling the Unexpected Tab 1 Circuit Protected ST CUT1 4WD IG MAIN IG MAIN2 − F/B MAIN2 F/B MAIN EPS − TRL E-BRAKE BMS H/L HI MAIN +B TRL HAZARD +B TRL BACKUP CTR ACC SOCKET TRAILER SMALL ACC/IG2_MAIN TRL CHARGE − − − FR DE-ICER RR _HTD SEAT STRLD Continued 593 uuFusesuFuse Locations ■ Interior Fuse Box Located under the dashboard. Fuse Box Handling the Unexpected 594 Fuse Label Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number. ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Circuit Protected DR P/W DOOR LOCK SMART AS P/W FR ACC SOCKET FUEL PUMP ACG FRONT WIPER ABS/VSA SRS REAR LEFT P/W BACK P/W REAR RIGHT P/W S/R FUEL LID DR P/SEAT (REC) CARGO LT FR SEAT HEATER INTR LT DR REAR DOOR UNLOCK AS SIDE DOOR UNLOCK DRL KEY LOCK A/C IG1a FEED BACK INST PANEL LIGHTS Amps 20 A 20 A 7.5 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 15 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A 20 A (20 A) 20 A 20 A (20 A) 7.5 A (20 A) 7.5 A 10 A 10 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Circuit Protected LUMBAR SUPPORT PARKING LIGHTS OPTION METER − MISS SOL SRS AS SIDE DOOR LOCK DR DOOR LOCK DR DOOR UNLOCK DR P/SEAT (SLIDE) RIGHT H/L HI LEFT H/L HI IG1b FEED BACK ACC DR REAR DOOR LOCK − Amps (7.5 A) 7.5 A 10 A 7.5 A − 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A 10 A 10 A (20 A) 10 A 10 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 10 A − uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses Inspecting and Changing Fuses Blown Fuse Combined Fuse 1Inspecting and Changing Fuses NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system. Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on P. 591 to P. 594. There is a fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse box located on the passenger’s side. Handling the Unexpected Fuse Puller 1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Turn headlights and all accessories off. 2. Remove the fuse box cover. 3. Check the large fuse in the engine compartment. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one. 4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one. 595 Emergency Towing Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. All models ■ Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle. 1Emergency Towing NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle’s weight. NOTICE 2WD models ■ Wheel lift equipment Handling the Unexpected 596 The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle. Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission. Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break. When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door ■ What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure. 1. Open the rear driver side door. 2. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the cover slot as Cover shown in the image, and remove the cover. 3. Pull the release lever toward you. u The release lever unlocks the fuel fill door when it is pulled. After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked. Handling the Unexpected Release Lever 1What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door 597 Refueling Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle. 1. Turn off the engine. Funnel 2. Press the fuel fill door release button. u The fuel fill door opens. 3. Open the trunk and pull out the tire tray with the handles. 2 Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire P. 570 4. Remove the funnel from the tool box. Handling the Unexpected Funnel 5. Place the end of the funnel on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully. u Make sure that the end of the funnel goes down along with the filler pipe. 6. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel container. u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any. 7. Remove the funnel from the filler neck. u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before storing it. 8. Shut the fuel fill door by hand. 598 1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container 3 WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel. • Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. • Handle fuel only outdoors. • Wipe up spills immediately. 3 WARNING Do not fill a portable fuel container in the pickup bed. Static electricity can ignite gas vapors and you can be burned. NOTICE Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system. Do not try to pry open or push open the filler opening with foreign objects. This can damage the filler opening and its seal. Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel. uuRefuelinguRefueling From a Portable Fuel Container 1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container Your vehicle has a warning label for filling a portable fuel container on the left rear side of the pickup bed. Whenever filling a fuel container, use an approved fuel container, and place it on the ground. Do not fill the fuel container in the vehicle, including the pickup bed and the trunk. Make sure to put the fuel pump nozzle in the fuel filler of the container securely and to handle it properly. Handling the Unexpected 599 600 Information This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation. Specifications .................................... 602 Identification Numbers Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number ......................................... 604 Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 605 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 606 Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 607 Warranty Coverages ........................ 609 Authorized Manuals......................... 611 Customer Service Information......... 612 601 Specifications ■ Vehicle Specifications ■ Engine Specifications Model Ridgeline No. of Passengers: Front 2 Rear 3 Total 5 Weights: Gross Vehicle 6019 lbs (2730 kg)*1 Weight Rating 5710 lbs (2590 kg)*2 Gross Axle Weight 3131 lbs (1420 kg)*1 Rating (Front) 3042 lbs (1380 kg)*2 Gross Axle Weight 3219 lbs (1460 kg)*1 Rating (Rear) 3042 lbs (1380 kg)*2 Gross Combined Weight 9987 lbs (4530 kg)*1 Rating 8201 lbs (3720 kg)*2 Displacement Spark Plugs *1: Models with AWD *2: Models with 2WD 211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm3) NGK DILZKR7B11G ■ Fuel Type Fuel Tank Capacity Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher 19.5 US gal (73.8 L) ■ Light Bulbs Headlights (Low Beam) Headlights (High Beam) Fog Lights * Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights * Parking Lights * Front Side Marker Lights Daytime Running Lights ■ Washer Fluid Tank Capacity U.S.: 1.0 US gal (3.8 L) Canada: 1.4 US gal (5.3 L) Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors) * Rear Side Marker Lights Brake/Taillights Back-Up Lights Rear Turn Signal Lights High-Mount Brake Light Rear License Plate Lights Information ■ Air Conditioning Bed Lights Air Conditioning: Refrigerant Type Charge Quantity Lubricant Type Quantity Interior Lights HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) 20.3 – 22.0 oz (575 – 625 g) RL85HM (POE) 7.5 – 8.7 cu-in (123 – 143 cm3) Front Map Lights Rear Map Lights Vanity Mirror Lights * Door Pocket Lights * Beverage Holder Light * Door Courtesy Lights * Door Inner Handle Lights * Console Compartment Light Glove Box Light Foot Lights * *1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6: 602 * Not available on all models Models with LED low beam headlights Models without LED low beam headlights Models with LED day time running lights Models without LED day time running lights Models with moonroof Models without moonroof LED*1 55 W*2 (H11) 60W (HB3) 35 W (H8) 28/8 W (Amber) LED LED LED*3 60W (HB3)*4 LED LED LED 21 W 21 W LED 5W LED*1 3CP*2 LED*5 5 W*6 5W 1.4 W LED LED 3.8 W LED 1.4 W 1.4 W LED uuSpecificationsu ■ Brake Fluid Specified ■ Engine Oil Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 ■ Automatic Transmission Fluid Specified Capacity Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid) Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 L) ■ Rear Differential Fluid * Specified Capacity Honda All Wheel Drive Fluid (DPSF-II) Change 1.92 US qt (1.82 L) ■ Transfer Assembly Fluid * Specified Capacity ·Honda Hypoid Gear Oil HGO-1 ·Hypoid gear oil SAE 75W-85 or SAE 90 (API grade GL4 or GL5) Change 0.45 US qt (0.43 L) Recommended Capacity ■ Tire ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil Change 5.4 US qt (5.1 L) Change including 5.7 US qt (5.4 L) filter Regular Compact Spare Wheel Size ■ Engine Coolant Specified Ratio Capacity Size Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) Size Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) Regular Compact Spare 245/60R18 105H 35 (240 [2.4]) T165/90R17 105M 60 (420 [4.2]) 18 x 8J 17 x 4T Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 50/50 with distilled water 1.88 US gal (7.13 L) (change including the remaining 0.19 US gal (0.72 L) in the reserve tank) Information * Not available on all models 603 Identification Numbers Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows. 1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover. Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number Cover Information 604 Automatic Transmission Number Certification Label/Vehicle Identification Number Devices that Emit Radio Waves The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation. HondaLink * Audio System Blind spot information System * Bluetooth® Audio Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM* Immobilizer System Remote Transmitter Smart Entry System * Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Remote Engine Start System * Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada Standard, described below: Information As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. * Not available on all models 605 Reporting Safety Defects In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada. Information If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety. 606 Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes Your vehicle has readiness codes as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some States use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected. To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. 1Testing of Readiness Codes The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions. If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer. If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following: Continued Information 1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes. 6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds. 607 uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes 7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds). 8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. 9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes. Information 608 Warranty Coverages ■ U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship. Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information. Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit. Information Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details. Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship. Continued 609 uuWarranty Coveragesu Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from a dealer. Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle. Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet. ■ Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle. ■ EPA Contact Information An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting: Information 610 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Transportation and Air Quality Compliance Division, Light-Duty Vehicle Group Attn: Warranty Complaints 2000 Traverwood Drive Ann Arbor, MI 48105 Email: [email protected] Authorized Manuals ■ Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options. ■ For U.S. Owners Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1-(800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com. ■ For Canadian Owners Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require. Information 611 Customer Service Information Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services. U.S. Owners American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009 Information 612 In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546 Canadian Owners Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: [email protected] 1Customer Service Information When you call or write, please give us the following information: • Vehicle Identification Number 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number P. 604 • Date of purchase • Odometer reading of your vehicle • Your name, address, and telephone number • A detailed description of the problem • Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you Index Index A Closing Apps........................................... 240 Display Setup .................................. 213, 244 Error Messages........................................ 295 General Information ................................ 299 Home Screen........................................... 233 Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 245 MP3/WMA/AAC...................... 219, 262, 274 Playing a CD............................................ 262 Reactivating ............................................ 204 Recommended CDs................................. 300 Remote Controls ..................................... 205 Security Code.......................................... 204 Selecting an Audio Source....................... 245 Status Area ............................................. 239 Theft Protection ...................................... 204 USB Flash Drives ...................................... 302 USB Port.................................................. 201 Wallpaper Setup.............................. 210, 231 Audio/Information Screen ............... 208, 226 Authorized Manuals ................................ 611 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 124 Customize............................................... 341 Auto High-Beam....................................... 151 Auto high-beam Indicator ......................... 81 Automatic Intermittent Wipers............... 155 Automatic Lighting .................................. 147 Index ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 492 AC Power Outlet ...................................... 184 Accessories and Modifications ................ 565 Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 177 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)................ 457 Indicator ................................................... 85 Additives Coolant .................................................. 535 Engine Oil ............................................... 530 Washer ................................................... 538 Adjusting Armrest .................................................. 170 Front Seats.............................................. 163 Head Restraints............................... 168, 169 Mirrors.................................................... 161 Rear Seats............................................... 166 Steering Wheel ....................................... 160 Temperature ........................................... 106 Agile Handling Assist............................... 480 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System) ....................... 188 Changing the Mode................................ 189 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows .............................................. 189 Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 558 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 189 Sensor .................................................... 194 Synchronized Mode ................................ 191 Using Automatic Climate Control............ 188 Air Conditioning System (Heating and Cooling System) ............... 195 Cooling ................................................... 197 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ............................................... 198 Heating ................................................... 196 Air Pressure ....................................... 548, 603 Airbags ........................................................ 42 Advanced Airbags ..................................... 48 After a Collision......................................... 46 Airbag Care ............................................... 54 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 45 Indicator .............................................. 52, 77 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 53 Sensors...................................................... 42 Side Airbags .............................................. 49 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 51 All-wheel drive (AWD) Indicator ............... 83 AM/FM Radio .................................... 214, 250 Android Auto............................................ 290 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 492 Indicator .................................................... 77 Apple CarPlay ........................................... 287 Armrest ..................................................... 170 Audio Remote Controls............................ 205 Audio System ............................................ 200 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 212, 243 Audio/Information Screen ................ 208, 226 Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 203 Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout ................................................... 230 613 Automatic Transmission ........................... Creeping ................................................. Fluid ........................................................ Kickdown ................................................ Shift Lever Does Not Move....................... Shift Lever Operation ............................... Shifting.................................................... Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. Average Fuel Economy............................. 441 441 537 441 584 443 442 203 106 B Index 614 Battery....................................................... 556 Charging System Indicator ................. 75, 587 Jump Starting .......................................... 581 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ........ 556 Maintenance (Replacing).......................... 557 Bed Lights.................................................. 186 Indicator .................................................... 90 Belts (Seat) .................................................. 35 Beverage Holders...................................... 175 Blind spot information (BSI) System ........ 486 Indicator .................................................... 87 Bluetooth® Audio ............................. 222, 277 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............. 352, 377 Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 69 Brake System............................................. 490 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 492 Brake Assist System ................................. 493 Brake System Indicator............................... 74 Fluid ........................................................ 538 Foot Brake............................................... 491 Indicator............................................ 74, 589 Parking Brake .......................................... 490 Brake System Indicator (Amber)................ 74 Brake System Indicator (Red)..................... 74 Brightness Control (Instrument Panel).... 157 Bulb Replacement .................................... 539 Brake/Taillight and Rear Side Marker Light...................................................... 543 Daytime Running Light and Parking Light...................................................... 541 Front Side Marker Light ........................... 541 Front Turn Signal/Parking and Fog Light...................................................... 542 Headlights............................................... 539 High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 544 Rear License Plate Light ........................... 544 Rear Turn Signal and Back-Up Light......... 543 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light...................................................... 542 Bulb Specifications ................................... 602 C Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 70 Cargo Hooks ............................................. 187 Carrying Cargo ......................... 413, 415, 418 CD Player................................................... 262 Certification Label.................................... 604 Changing Bulbs ........................................ 539 Charging System Indicator................. 75, 587 Child Safety ................................................ 55 Childproof Door Locks ............................ 123 Emergency Trunk Opener........................ 132 Child Seat ................................................... 55 Booster Seats ............................................ 69 Child Seat for Infants ................................ 57 Child Seat for Small Children .................... 58 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ......................................................... 63 Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat ........................................................ 60 Larger Children ......................................... 68 Rear-facing Child Seat............................... 57 Selecting a Child Seat ............................... 59 Using a Tether .......................................... 65 Childproof Door Locks ............................. 123 Cleaning the Exterior............................... 561 Cleaning the Interior ............................... 559 Climate Control System ........................... 188 Changing the Mode................................ 188 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows .............................................. 189 Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 558 Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 189 Sensors ................................................... 194 Synchronized Mode ................................ 191 Using Automatic Climate Control............ 188 Clock ......................................................... 110 Coat Hook ................................................ 178 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ................................................. 494 Indicator ............................................. 88, 89 Compact Spare Tire.......................... 569, 603 Console Compartment............................. 174 Controls .................................................... 109 Conversation Mirror ................................ 179 Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 535 Adding to the Radiator ........................... 536 Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 535 Overheating............................................ 585 Creeping (Automatic Transmission)........ 441 Cross Traffic Monitor ............................... 508 Cruise Control .......................................... 447 Indicator ................................................... 82 Cup Holders.............................................. 175 Customer Service Information ................ 612 Customized Features ............................... 318 D E ECON Button............................................. 444 ECON Mode Indicator ................................ 87 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator............................................ 80, 589 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 478 Emergency ................................................ 596 Emergency Trunk Opener........................ 132 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 607 Engine ....................................................... 604 Coolant................................................... 535 Jump Starting.......................................... 581 Oil........................................................... 530 Remote Engine Start................................ 436 Starting ................................................... 434 Engine Compartment Cover .................... 529 Engine Coolant......................................... 535 Adding to the Radiator............................ 536 Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 535 Overheating ............................................ 585 Temperature Gauge ................................ 103 Engine Oil ................................................. 530 Adding.................................................... 532 Checking................................................. 531 Displaying Oil Life.................................... 523 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 75, 587 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 530 ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 142 EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ............................................... 80, 589 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 70 Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 561 Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 162 Index Daytime Running Lights .......................... 150 Dead Battery ............................................ 581 Defaulting All the Settings...................... 348 Defogger/Heated Door Mirror................ 156 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows......................................... 189, 198 Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 605 Dimming Headlights .............................................. 146 Rearview Mirror ...................................... 161 Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 531 Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 145 Display Button .......................................... 226 Door Mirrors ............................................. 162 Doors ......................................................... 111 Auto Door Locking .................................. 124 Auto Door Unlocking............................... 124 Door Open Message ............................ 34, 91 Keys ........................................................ 111 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ................................ 14, 121 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ................................... 114 Lockout Prevention System ...................... 120 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 550 Driving....................................................... 411 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 457 Automatic Transmission........................... 441 Braking.................................................... 490 Cruise Control ......................................... 447 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............... 432 Starting the Engine .................................. 434 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle..................................................... 440 Driving Position Memory System............. 158 Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 558 615 F Index 616 Features..................................................... 199 Filters Dust and Pollen ....................................... 558 Oil ........................................................... 533 Flat Tire ..................................................... 569 Floor Mats ................................................. 560 Fluids Automatic Transmission........................... 537 Brake....................................................... 538 Engine Coolant........................................ 535 Windshield Washer.................................. 538 FM/AM Radio .................................... 214, 250 Fog Lights.................................................. 149 Indicator .................................................... 81 Folding Up the Rear Seat ......................... 166 Foot Brake................................................. 491 Front Airbags (SRS) ..................................... 45 Front Seats ................................................ 163 Adjusting................................................. 163 Front Sensor Camera ................................ 450 Fuel ...................................................... 21, 514 Economy ................................................. 517 Gauge ..................................................... 103 Instant Fuel Economy............................... 107 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 77 Range...................................................... 107 Recommendation .................................... 514 Refueling ................................................. 514 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions ............ 517 Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 21, 515 Unable to Unlock .................................... 597 Fuses.......................................................... 591 Inspecting and Changing......................... 595 Locations................................. 591, 593, 594 G Gasoline (Fuel) Economy ................................................. 517 Gauge..................................................... 103 Information ............................................. 514 Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 107 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 77 Refueling................................................. 514 Gauges ...................................................... 103 Glass (care)................................................ 563 Glove Box.................................................. 173 H Halogen Bulbs .......................................... 539 Handling the Unexpected........................ 567 HandsFreeLink® (HFL)....................... 352, 377 Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History.................................... 366, 390 Caller’s ID Information............................. 364 Displaying Messages................................ 404 HFL Buttons..................................... 352, 377 HFL Menus ...................................... 354, 380 HFL Status Display ........................... 353, 379 In Case of Emergency ............................. 408 Limitations for Manual Operation.... 353, 379 Making a Call ................................. 371, 398 Options During a Call...................... 376, 401 Phone Setup ................................... 358, 385 Phonebook Phonetic Modification........... 394 Receiving a Call............................... 375, 401 Receiving a Text Message/E-mail ............. 402 Ring Tone ....................................... 364, 389 Selecting a Mail Account......................... 403 Speed Dial ...................................... 367, 391 To Clear the System ................................ 365 To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail Options................................................. 388 Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4 Hazard Warning Indicator......................... 80 HD RadioTM ............................................... 250 Head Restraints ................................ 168, 169 Headlights ................................................ 146 Aiming.................................................... 539 Auto High-Beam ..................................... 151 Automatic Operation .............................. 147 Dimming......................................... 146, 150 Operating ............................................... 146 Heated Door Mirrors ............................... 156 Heated Steering Wheel ........................... 180 Heated Windshield Button...................... 156 Heater (Steering Wheel).......................... 180 Heaters (Seat)........................... 181, 182, 183 Heating and Cooling System................... 195 Cooling................................................... 197 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows .............................................. 198 Heating................................................... 196 HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ...................... 352, 377 High Beam Indicator.................................. 80 Hill Start Assist System............................. 439 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ........... 349 Honda App License Agreement .............. 303 Honda Sensing® ......................................... 22 HondaLink® .............................................. 279 I Information .............................................. 601 Information Button.................................. 104 Instant Fuel Economy............................... 107 Instrument Panel ........................................ 73 Brightness Control................................... 157 Intelligent Traction Management System ..................................................... 445 Intelligent Variable Torque ManagementTM (i-VTM4TM) AWD System......................... 481 Interior Lights ........................................... 171 Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 161 iPhone ....................................................... 302 iPod ........................................... 216, 265, 302 J Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 573 Jump Starting ........................................... 581 K Key Number Tag....................................... Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... Keys ........................................................... Lockout Prevention.................................. Number Tag ............................................ Rear Door Won’t Open............................ Remote Transmitter................................. Types and Functions ................................ Kickdown (Automatic Transmission)....... 112 120 111 120 112 123 119 111 441 Index Identification Numbers............................ 604 Engine and Transmission......................... 604 Vehicle Identification............................... 604 Illumination Control ................................ 157 Button .................................................... 157 Immobilizer System.................................. 133 Indicator ................................................... 81 In-Bed Box ................................................ 184 Indicators.................................................... 74 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).................. 85 All-wheel drive (AWD)............................... 83 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 77 Auto high-beam ....................................... 81 Bed Lights On ........................................... 90 Blind spot information (BSI)............... 87, 487 Brake System (Amber)............................... 74 Charging System ............................... 75, 587 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ........................................... 88, 89 CRUISE CONTROL.............................. 82, 448 CRUISE MAIN .................................... 82, 447 ECON Mode .............................................. 87 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System............................................. 80, 589 Fog Lights.................................................. 81 High Beam ................................................ 80 Immobilizer System.................................... 81 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .... 86, 472 Lights On................................................... 81 Low Fuel.................................................... 77 Low Oil Pressure ................................ 75, 587 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ..................... 80, 590 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 75, 588 Parking Brake and Brake System (Red)................................................ 74, 589 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).............. 84 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 36, 76 Security System Alarm ............................... 82 Shift Lever Position .................................... 76 Smart Entry System.................................... 83 Supplemental Restraint System ............ 52, 77 System Message ........................................ 82 Transmission.............................................. 76 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 80 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) OFF............ 479 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System............................................. 78, 478 617 L Index 618 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ......... 470 Indicator .................................................... 86 LaneWatchTM ............................................. 488 Language (HFL)................................. 353, 379 LATCH (Child Seats) .............................. 60, 65 Lights ................................................. 146, 539 Automatic ............................................... 147 Bed.......................................................... 186 Bulb Replacement.................................... 539 Daytime Running Lights ........................... 150 High Beam Indicator .................................. 80 Interior .................................................... 171 Light Switches ......................................... 146 Lights On Indicator .................................... 81 Turn Signals............................................. 145 Load Limits ................................................ 415 Locking/Unlocking .................................... 111 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 124 Childproof Door Locks ............................. 123 From Inside.............................................. 121 From Outside........................................... 114 Keys ........................................................ 111 Using a Key ............................................. 120 Lockout Prevention System...................... 120 Low Battery Charge.................................. 587 Low Fuel Indicator ...................................... 77 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 75, 587 Low Tire Pressure Indicator........................ 80 Lower Anchors ...................................... 60, 65 Lubricant Specifications Chart ................. 603 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 415 Lumbar Support ....................................... 163 M Maintenance............................................. 519 Battery .................................................... 556 Brake Fluid .............................................. 538 Cleaning ................................................. 559 Climate Control System........................... 558 Coolant................................................... 535 Heating and Cooling System ................... 558 Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 523 Oil........................................................... 531 Precautions ............................................. 520 Radiator .................................................. 536 Remote Transmitter................................. 557 Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 539 Safety...................................................... 521 Service Items ........................................... 525 Tires ........................................................ 547 Transmission Fluid ................................... 537 Under the Hood ...................................... 527 Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 75, 588 Map Lights ................................................ 172 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 415 Meters, Gauges......................................... 103 Mirrors ...................................................... 161 Adjusting ................................................ 161 Door ....................................................... 162 Exterior ................................................... 162 Interior Rearview ..................................... 161 Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 565 Moonroof ................................................. 140 MP3........................................... 219, 262, 274 MP3/WMA/AAC........................ 219, 262, 274 Multi-Information Display ....................... 104 Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 512 N Numbers (Identification) ......................... 604 O Odometer ................................................. 105 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............. 432 Oil (Engine) .............................................. 530 Adding ................................................... 532 Checking ................................................ 531 Displaying Oil Life ................................... 523 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 75, 587 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 530 Viscosity.................................................. 530 Open Source Licenses .............................. 317 Opening/Closing Hood ...................................................... 528 Moonroof ............................................... 140 Power Windows...................................... 136 Tailgate................................................... 128 Trunk ...................................................... 130 Outside Temperature Display ................. 106 Overheating ............................................. 585 P Pandora® .................................................. 272 Panic Mode............................................... 135 Parking ..................................................... 503 Parking Brake........................................... 490 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator ........................................... 74, 589 Parking Sensor System............................. 504 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator................. 53 Passing Indicators..................................... 146 Playing Bluetooth® Audio ............... 222, 277 Power Windows ....................................... 136 Precautions While Driving....................... 440 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle.................................................. 440 Rain ........................................................ 440 Pregnant Women....................................... 40 Puncture (Tire) ......................................... 569 R S Safe Driving ................................................ 29 Safety Check ............................................... 34 Safety Labels............................................... 71 Safety Message............................................. 1 Seat Belts .................................................... 35 Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 39 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 37 Checking................................................... 41 Fastening .................................................. 38 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ......................................................... 63 Pregnant Women ...................................... 40 Reminder .................................................. 36 Warning Indicator ............................... 36, 76 Seat Heaters.............................. 181, 182, 183 Seat Ventilation........................................ 182 Seats .......................................................... 163 Adjusting ................................................ 163 Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support .................. 163 Front Seats .............................................. 163 Rear Seats ............................................... 166 Seat Heaters............................ 181, 182, 183 Seat Ventilation....................................... 182 Security System......................................... 133 Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 81 Security System Alarm Indicator................. 82 Selecting a Child Seat................................. 59 Selector Knob (Audio).............................. 207 Setting the Clock ...................................... 110 Index Radiator.................................................... 536 Radio (FM/AM) ................................. 214, 250 Radio (SiriusXM®)..................................... 254 Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 215, 252 Range........................................................ 107 RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 215, 252 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ...... 607 Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel ................................ 193 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button ..................................................... 156 Rear Outer Seat Heaters .......................... 183 Rear Seats.................................................. 166 Rearview Mirror........................................ 161 Refueling................................................... 514 Fuel Gauge .............................................. 103 Gasoline .......................................... 514, 602 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 77 Regulations ............................... 484, 550, 605 Remote Engine Start ................................ 436 Remote Transmitter ................................. 119 Replacement Battery .................................................... 557 Bulbs ....................................................... 539 Fuses ....................................... 591, 593, 594 Tires ........................................................ 553 Wiper Blade Rubber................................. 545 Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 606 RESET Button ............................................ 104 Resetting a Trip Meter ............................. 106 Reverse Tilt Door Mirror .......................... 162 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).......... 452 Indicator .................................................... 84 On and Off .............................................. 454 619 Index 620 Shift Lever ................................... 20, 442, 443 Does Not Move........................................ 584 Operation .................................. 20, 442, 443 Releasing ................................................. 584 Shift Lever Position Indicator..................... 76 Shifting (Transmission) ....................... 20, 442 Shoulder Anchor......................................... 39 Side Airbags ................................................ 49 Side Curtain Airbags................................... 51 Siri Eyes Free ............................................. 286 SiriusXM® Radio ........................................ 254 Smart Entry System Indicator..................... 83 Smart Entry with Push Button Start System...................................................... 114 Snow Tires ................................................. 555 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) .............................. 268 Spare Tire .......................................... 569, 603 Spark Plugs................................................ 602 Specifications ............................................ 602 Specified Fuel.................................... 514, 602 Speedometer............................................. 103 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 45 Starting the Engine .................................. 434 Does Not Start ......................................... 578 Jump Starting .......................................... 581 Remote Engine Start ................................ 436 Steering Wheel ......................................... 160 Adjusting................................................. 160 Heater ..................................................... 180 Stopping.................................................... 503 Summer Tires ............................................ 555 Sunglasses Holder..................................... 179 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 45 Indicator.................................................... 77 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 4, 5, 142 SYNC Mode............................................... 191 System Message Indicator.......................... 82 T Tachometer............................................... 103 Tailgate ..................................................... 128 Temperature Gauge..................................................... 103 Outside Temperature Display................... 106 Temperature Gauge................................. 103 Temperature Sensor......................... 106, 194 Tie-down Anchors .................................... 186 Time (Setting) ........................................... 110 Tire Fill Assist .................................... 482, 590 Tires........................................................... 547 Air Pressure ..................................... 548, 603 Checking and Maintaining ...................... 547 Inspection ............................................... 547 Labeling .................................................. 548 Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 569 Regulations ............................................. 550 Rotation .................................................. 554 Spare Tire........................................ 569, 603 Summer .................................................. 555 Tire Chains .............................................. 555 Wear Indicators....................................... 552 Winter .................................................... 555 Tools ......................................................... 568 Towing a Trailer....................................... 420 Equipment and Accessories..................... 424 Load Limits ............................................. 420 Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 431 Emergency.............................................. 596 TPMS with Tire Fill Assist ......................... 482 Indicator ........................................... 80, 590 Tire Fill Assist .......................................... 590 Trailer Stability Assist............................... 429 Transmission............................... 20, 441, 442 Automatic....................................... 441, 442 Fluid ....................................................... 537 Number .................................................. 604 Shift Lever Position Indicator ..................... 76 Transmission Indicator............................... 76 Trip Meter ................................................ 106 Troubleshooting ...................................... 567 Blown Fuse ............................. 591, 593, 594 Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 25 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 26 Emergency Towing ................................. 596 Engine Won’t Start ................................. 578 Noise When Braking ................................. 26 Overheating............................................ 585 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 569 Rear Door Won’t Open ..................... 26, 123 Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 584 Warning Indicators.................................... 74 Trunk ........................................................ 130 Lid .......................................................... 130 Main Switch............................................ 131 Turn Signals.............................................. 145 Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 80 Turn-by-Turn Directions .......................... 107 U Unlocking the Doors................................ 114 Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside................................. 14, 121 USB Flash Drives ....................... 219, 274, 302 USB Port.................................................... 201 V 248 247 246 478 W Wallpaper ......................................... 210, 231 Warning and Information Messages ......... 91 Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 587 Warning Labels ........................................... 71 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately)............................................... 609 Watts ......................................................... 602 Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 552 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 573 Wi-Fi Connection ...................................... 284 Window Washers...................................... 154 Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 538 Switch ..................................................... 154 Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 136 Windshield ................................................ 154 Cleaning.................................................. 563 Defrosting ............................................... 198 Defrosting/Defogging .............................. 189 Washer Fluid ........................................... 538 Wiper Blades ........................................... 545 Wipers and Washers ................................ 154 Winter Tires .............................................. 555 Snow Tires............................................... 555 Tire Chains .............................................. 555 Wipers and Washers................................. 154 Automatic Intermittent Wipers ................ 155 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 545 Front ....................................................... 154 WMA ......................................... 219, 262, 274 Worn Tires ................................................ 547 Index Vanity Mirrors .............................................. 7 Vehicle Identification Number................ 604 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) ................. 478 Off Button .............................................. 479 System Indicator ............................... 78, 478 Ventilation ............................................... 195 Viscosity (Oil).................................... 530, 603 Voice Control Operation ......................... 246 Audio Commands................................... 248 Climate Control Commands.................... 249 General Commands ................................ 249 Music Search Commands........................ 249 On Screen Commands ............................ 249 Phone Commands .................................. 248 Useful Commands ................................... Voice Portal Screen .................................. Voice Recognition.................................... VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) .................. 621 31T6Z620 OM-07359 00X31-T6Z-6200 owners.honda.com (U.S.) myhonda.ca (Canada) 2019 Honda Ridgeline Owner’s Manual ©2018 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A.
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project